Introduction
This is the first of a series of papers concerning what might be thought of as ‘locally grouped spaces’, in a loose analogy with the locally ringed spaces of algebraic geometry. The spaces that we have in mind are simplicial sets that generalise the simplicial sets that underlie and determine the classifying spaces of finite (or compact) groups. If the analogy is pursued, then the role of ‘structure sheaf’ is provided by the ‘fusion systems’ associated with these spaces. Our approach here will be purely algebraic and combinatorial, so we will not be concerned with topological realisations. All of the groups to be considered will be finite; but a parallel series of papers representing some joint work with Alex Gonzalez will considerably broaden the scope.
 Finite localities were introduced by the author in [Reference ChermakCh1], in order to give a positive solution to this question: Given a saturated fusion system 
 $\mathcal {F}$
 on a finite p-group, does there exist a ‘classifying space’ for
$\mathcal {F}$
 on a finite p-group, does there exist a ‘classifying space’ for 
 $\mathcal {F}$
, and if so, is such a space unique up to isomorphism? The solution given in [Reference ChermakCh1] was closely tied to the specific goal and did not allow for a complete development of ideas. The aim here is to provide such a development. In part, our aim is to supplement the theory of saturated fusion systems over a finite p-group. As part of that program, we shall need to establish a sort of dictionary that will establish an equivalence between such notions as ‘partial normal subgroup of a proper locality’ and ‘normal subsystem of a saturated fusion system’. This is done in a separate paper coauthored with Ellen Henke [Reference Chermak and HenkeChHe].
$\mathcal {F}$
, and if so, is such a space unique up to isomorphism? The solution given in [Reference ChermakCh1] was closely tied to the specific goal and did not allow for a complete development of ideas. The aim here is to provide such a development. In part, our aim is to supplement the theory of saturated fusion systems over a finite p-group. As part of that program, we shall need to establish a sort of dictionary that will establish an equivalence between such notions as ‘partial normal subgroup of a proper locality’ and ‘normal subsystem of a saturated fusion system’. This is done in a separate paper coauthored with Ellen Henke [Reference Chermak and HenkeChHe].
 The division into several papers closely parallels the extent to which fusion systems are drawn into the developing picture. This Part I can be characterised by its having no direct involvement with fusion systems, and by there being no mention in it of 
 $p'$
-elements or
$p'$
-elements or 
 $p'$
-subgroups of a group, other than in one application (see Proposition 4.12).
$p'$
-subgroups of a group, other than in one application (see Proposition 4.12).
 Let G be a group, and let 
 $\mathbf {W}(G)$
 be the free monoid on G. Thus,
$\mathbf {W}(G)$
 be the free monoid on G. Thus, 
 $\mathbf {W}(G)$
 is the set of all words in the alphabet G, with the binary operation given by concatenation of words. The product
$\mathbf {W}(G)$
 is the set of all words in the alphabet G, with the binary operation given by concatenation of words. The product 
 $G\times G\to G$
 extends, by generalised associativity, to a ‘product’
$G\times G\to G$
 extends, by generalised associativity, to a ‘product’ 
 $\Pi :\mathbf {W}(G)\to G$
, whereby a word
$\Pi :\mathbf {W}(G)\to G$
, whereby a word 
 $w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(G)$
 is mapped to
$w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(G)$
 is mapped to 
 $g_1\cdots g_n$
. The inversion map on G induces an ‘inversion’ on
$g_1\cdots g_n$
. The inversion map on G induces an ‘inversion’ on 
 $\mathbf {W}(G)$
, sending w to
$\mathbf {W}(G)$
, sending w to 
 $(g_n^{-1},\cdots ,g_1^{-1})$
. In fact, one may easily replace the standard definition of ‘group’ by a definition given in terms of
$(g_n^{-1},\cdots ,g_1^{-1})$
. In fact, one may easily replace the standard definition of ‘group’ by a definition given in terms of 
 $\Pi $
 and the inversion on
$\Pi $
 and the inversion on 
 $\mathbf {W}(G)$
. One obtains the notion of partial group by restricting the domain of
$\mathbf {W}(G)$
. One obtains the notion of partial group by restricting the domain of 
 $\Pi $
 to a subset
$\Pi $
 to a subset 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 of
$\mathbf {D}$
 of 
 $\mathbf {W}(G)$
, where
$\mathbf {W}(G)$
, where 
 $\mathbf {D}$
, the product, and the inversion, are required to satisfy conditions (see Definition 1.1) that preserve the outlines of the strictly group-theoretic setup. When one looks at things in this way, a group is simply a partial group G having the property that
$\mathbf {D}$
, the product, and the inversion, are required to satisfy conditions (see Definition 1.1) that preserve the outlines of the strictly group-theoretic setup. When one looks at things in this way, a group is simply a partial group G having the property that 
 $\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {W}(G)$
.
$\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {W}(G)$
.
 The notions of partial subgroup and homomorphism of partial groups immediately suggest themselves, and a partial subgroup of a partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 may in fact be a group. We say that the partial group
$\mathcal {L}$
 may in fact be a group. We say that the partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is ‘objective’ (see Definition 2.1) provided that the domain
$\mathcal {L}$
 is ‘objective’ (see Definition 2.1) provided that the domain 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 of the product is determined in a certain way by a collection
$\mathbf {D}$
 of the product is determined in a certain way by a collection 
 $\Delta $
 of subgroups of
$\Delta $
 of subgroups of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 (the set of ‘objects’), and provided that
$\mathcal {L}$
 (the set of ‘objects’), and provided that 
 $\Delta $
 has a certain ‘closure’ property. If also
$\Delta $
 has a certain ‘closure’ property. If also 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is finite and there exists
$\mathcal {L}$
 is finite and there exists 
 $S\in \Delta $
 such that
$S\in \Delta $
 such that 
 $\Delta $
 is a collection of subgroups of S, where S is maximal in the set (partially ordered by inclusion) of p-subgroups of
$\Delta $
 is a collection of subgroups of S, where S is maximal in the set (partially ordered by inclusion) of p-subgroups of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, then
$\mathcal {L}$
, then 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 is a (finite) locality.
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 is a (finite) locality.
 The basic properties of partial groups, objective partial groups and localities will be derived in Sections 1 and 2. We then begin in Section 3 to consider partial normal subgroups of localities in detail. One of the two key results in Section 3 is the Frattini lemma (Corollary 3.11), which states that if 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 is a partial normal subgroup, then
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 is a partial normal subgroup, then 
 $\mathcal {L}=N_{\mathcal {L}}(S\cap \mathcal {N})\mathcal {N}$
. The other is Stellmacher’s splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12), which leads to the partition of
$\mathcal {L}=N_{\mathcal {L}}(S\cap \mathcal {N})\mathcal {N}$
. The other is Stellmacher’s splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12), which leads to the partition of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 into a collection of ‘maximal cosets’ of
$\mathcal {L}$
 into a collection of ‘maximal cosets’ of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 and to a partial group structure on the set
$\mathcal {N}$
 and to a partial group structure on the set 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of maximal cosets. In Section 4, it is shown that
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of maximal cosets. In Section 4, it is shown that 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 is in fact a locality, and we obtain versions of the first Nóther isomorphism theorem and its familiar consequences. In particular, the notions ‘partial normal subgroup’ and ‘kernel of a projection’ turn out to be equivalent. This may be compared with the situation in the theory of saturated fusion systems, where it is known that no such equivalence exists.
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 is in fact a locality, and we obtain versions of the first Nóther isomorphism theorem and its familiar consequences. In particular, the notions ‘partial normal subgroup’ and ‘kernel of a projection’ turn out to be equivalent. This may be compared with the situation in the theory of saturated fusion systems, where it is known that no such equivalence exists.
Section 5 concerns products of partial normal subgroups. The main result here (Theorem 5.1) has since been considerably strengthened by Henke [Reference HenkeHe], who shows that the product of any two partial normal subgroups of a locality is again a partial normal subgroup. The paper ends with a result (Proposition 5.5) that provides an application of essentially all of the concepts and results from all of the earlier sections and will play a role in Part III.
 Composition of mappings will most often be written from left to right, and mappings that are likely to be composed with others will be written to the right of their arguments. In particular, this entails that conjugation within a group G be taken in the right-handed sense, which is standard in finite group theory; so that 
 $x^g=g^{-1} xg$
 for any
$x^g=g^{-1} xg$
 for any 
 $x,g\in G$
.
$x,g\in G$
.
1 Partial groups
The reader is asked to forget what a group is and to trust that what was forgotten will soon be recovered.
 For any set X, write 
 $\mathbf {W}(X)$
 for the free monoid on X. Thus, an element of
$\mathbf {W}(X)$
 for the free monoid on X. Thus, an element of 
 $\mathbf {W}(X)$
 is a finite sequence of (or word in) the elements of X, and the multiplication in
$\mathbf {W}(X)$
 is a finite sequence of (or word in) the elements of X, and the multiplication in 
 $\mathbf {W}(X)$
 consists of concatenation of words, to be denoted
$\mathbf {W}(X)$
 consists of concatenation of words, to be denoted 
 $u\circ v$
. The length of the word
$u\circ v$
. The length of the word 
 $(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)$
 is n. The empty word is the word
$(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)$
 is n. The empty word is the word 
 $(\emptyset )$
 of length 0. We make no distinction between X and the set of words of length
$(\emptyset )$
 of length 0. We make no distinction between X and the set of words of length 
 $1$
.
$1$
.
Definition 1.1. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a nonempty set, let
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a nonempty set, let 
 $\mathbf {W}=\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 be the free monoid on
$\mathbf {W}=\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 be the free monoid on 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, and let
$\mathcal {L}$
, and let 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 be a subset of
$\mathbf {D}$
 be a subset of 
 $\mathbf {W}$
 such that
$\mathbf {W}$
 such that 
- 
(1)  $\mathcal {L}\subseteq \mathbf {D}$
 (that is, $\mathcal {L}\subseteq \mathbf {D}$
 (that is, $\mathbf {D}$
 contains all words of length 1), and $\mathbf {D}$
 contains all words of length 1), and $$ \begin{align*} u\circ v\in\mathbf{D}\implies u,v\in\mathbf{D}. \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*} u\circ v\in\mathbf{D}\implies u,v\in\mathbf{D}. \end{align*} $$
Notice that since 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is nonempty, (1) implies that also the empty word is in
$\mathcal {L}$
 is nonempty, (1) implies that also the empty word is in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
.
$\mathbf {D}$
.
 A mapping 
 $\Pi :\mathbf {D}\to \mathcal {L}$
 is a product if
$\Pi :\mathbf {D}\to \mathcal {L}$
 is a product if 
- 
(2)  $\Pi $
 restricts to the identity map on $\Pi $
 restricts to the identity map on $\mathcal {L}$
, and $\mathcal {L}$
, and
- 
(3)  $u\circ v\circ w\in \mathbf {D}\implies u\circ \Pi (v)\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $u\circ v\circ w\in \mathbf {D}\implies u\circ \Pi (v)\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $\Pi (u\circ v\circ w)=\Pi (u\circ \Pi (v)\circ w)$
. $\Pi (u\circ v\circ w)=\Pi (u\circ \Pi (v)\circ w)$
.
 An inversion on 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 consists of an involutory bijection
$\mathcal {L}$
 consists of an involutory bijection 
 $x\mapsto x^{-1}$
 on
$x\mapsto x^{-1}$
 on 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, together with the mapping
$\mathcal {L}$
, together with the mapping 
 $w\mapsto w^{-1}$
 on
$w\mapsto w^{-1}$
 on 
 $\mathbf {W}$
 given by
$\mathbf {W}$
 given by 
 $$ \begin{align*} (x_1,\cdots,x_n)\mapsto(x_n^{-1},\cdots x_1^{-1}). \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} (x_1,\cdots,x_n)\mapsto(x_n^{-1},\cdots x_1^{-1}). \end{align*} $$
We say that 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, with the product
$\mathcal {L}$
, with the product 
 $\Pi :\mathbf {D}\to \mathcal {L}$
 and inversion
$\Pi :\mathbf {D}\to \mathcal {L}$
 and inversion 
 $(-)^{-1}$
, is a partial group if
$(-)^{-1}$
, is a partial group if 
- 
(4)  $w\in \mathbf {D}\implies w^{-1}\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
 and $w\in \mathbf {D}\implies w^{-1}\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
 and $\Pi (w^{-1}\circ w)=\mathbf {1}$
, $\Pi (w^{-1}\circ w)=\mathbf {1}$
,
where 
 $\mathbf {1}$
 denotes the image of the empty word under
$\mathbf {1}$
 denotes the image of the empty word under 
 $\Pi $
. Notice that (1) and (4) yield
$\Pi $
. Notice that (1) and (4) yield 
 $w^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
 if
$w^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
 if 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
. As
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
. As 
 $(w^{-1})^{-1}=w$
, condition (4) is symmetric.
$(w^{-1})^{-1}=w$
, condition (4) is symmetric.
Example 1.2. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be the
$\mathcal {L}$
 be the 
 $3$
-element set
$3$
-element set 
 $\{\mathbf {1},a,b\}$
, and let
$\{\mathbf {1},a,b\}$
, and let 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 be the subset of
$\mathbf {D}$
 be the subset of 
 $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 consisting of all words w such that the word obtained from w by deleting all entries equal to
$\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 consisting of all words w such that the word obtained from w by deleting all entries equal to 
 $\mathbf {1}$
 is an alternating string of as and bs (of odd or even length and that, if nonempty, may begin either with a or with b). Define
$\mathbf {1}$
 is an alternating string of as and bs (of odd or even length and that, if nonempty, may begin either with a or with b). Define 
 $\Pi :\mathbf {D}\to \mathcal {L}$
 by the formula
$\Pi :\mathbf {D}\to \mathcal {L}$
 by the formula 
 $\Pi (w)=\mathbf {1}$
 if the number of a-entries in w is equal to the number of bs;
$\Pi (w)=\mathbf {1}$
 if the number of a-entries in w is equal to the number of bs; 
 $\Pi (w)=a$
 if the number of as exceeds the number of bs (necessarily by 1); and
$\Pi (w)=a$
 if the number of as exceeds the number of bs (necessarily by 1); and 
 $\Pi (w)=b$
 if the number of bs exceeds the number of as. Define inversion on
$\Pi (w)=b$
 if the number of bs exceeds the number of as. Define inversion on 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 by
$\mathcal {L}$
 by 
 $\mathbf {1}^{-1}=\mathbf {1}$
,
$\mathbf {1}^{-1}=\mathbf {1}$
, 
 $a^{-1}=b$
 and
$a^{-1}=b$
 and 
 $b^{-1}=a$
. It is then easy to check that
$b^{-1}=a$
. It is then easy to check that 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, with these structures, is a partial group. In fact,
$\mathcal {L}$
, with these structures, is a partial group. In fact, 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is the ‘free partial group on one generator’, as will be made clear in Example 1.12 below.
$\mathcal {L}$
 is the ‘free partial group on one generator’, as will be made clear in Example 1.12 below.
 It will be convenient to make this definition: a group is a partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 in which
$\mathcal {L}$
 in which 
 $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})=\mathbf {D}$
. To distinguish between this definition and the usual one, we shall use the expression ‘binary group’ for a nonempty set G with an associative binary operation, identity element and inverses in the usual sense. The following lemma shows that the distinction is subtle.
$\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})=\mathbf {D}$
. To distinguish between this definition and the usual one, we shall use the expression ‘binary group’ for a nonempty set G with an associative binary operation, identity element and inverses in the usual sense. The following lemma shows that the distinction is subtle.
Lemma 1.3.
- 
(a) Let G be a binary group, and let  $\Pi :\mathbf {W}(G)\to G$
 be the ‘multivariable product’ on G given by $\Pi :\mathbf {W}(G)\to G$
 be the ‘multivariable product’ on G given by $(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\mapsto g_1\cdots g_n$
. Then G, together with $(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\mapsto g_1\cdots g_n$
. Then G, together with $\Pi $
 and the inversion in G, is a partial group, with $\Pi $
 and the inversion in G, is a partial group, with $\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {W}(G)$
. $\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {W}(G)$
.
- 
(b) Let  $\mathcal {L}$
 be a group: that is, a partial group for which $\mathcal {L}$
 be a group: that is, a partial group for which $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})=\mathbf {D}$
. Then $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})=\mathbf {D}$
. Then $\mathcal {L}$
 is a binary group with respect to the operation given by restricting $\mathcal {L}$
 is a binary group with respect to the operation given by restricting $\Pi $
 to words of length 2 and with respect to the inversion in $\Pi $
 to words of length 2 and with respect to the inversion in $\mathcal {L}$
. Moreover, $\mathcal {L}$
. Moreover, $\Pi $
 is then the multivariable product on $\Pi $
 is then the multivariable product on $\mathcal {L}$
 defined as in (a). $\mathcal {L}$
 defined as in (a).
Proof. Point (a) is given by generalised associativity in the binary group G. Point (b) is a straightforward exercise and is left to the reader.
Here are a few basic consequences of Definition 1.1.
Lemma 1.4. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 (with
$\mathcal {L}$
 (with 
 $\mathbf {D}$
,
$\mathbf {D}$
, 
 $\Pi $
, and the inversion) be a partial group.
$\Pi $
, and the inversion) be a partial group. 
- 
(a)  $\Pi $
 is $\Pi $
 is $\mathbf {D}$
-multiplicative. That is, if $\mathbf {D}$
-multiplicative. That is, if $u\circ v$
 is in $u\circ v$
 is in $\mathbf {D}$
, then the word $\mathbf {D}$
, then the word $(\Pi (u),\Pi (v))$
 of length 2 is in $(\Pi (u),\Pi (v))$
 of length 2 is in $\mathbf {D}$
, and where ‘ $\mathbf {D}$
, and where ‘ $$ \begin{align*}\Pi(u\circ v)=\Pi(u)\Pi(v), \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*}\Pi(u\circ v)=\Pi(u)\Pi(v), \end{align*} $$ $\Pi (u)\Pi (v)$
’ is an abbreviation for $\Pi (u)\Pi (v)$
’ is an abbreviation for $\Pi ((\Pi (u),\Pi (v))$
. $\Pi ((\Pi (u),\Pi (v))$
.
- 
(b)  $\Pi $
 is $\Pi $
 is $\mathbf {D}$
-associative. That is, $\mathbf {D}$
-associative. That is, $$ \begin{align*} u\circ v\circ w\in\mathbf{D}\implies\Pi(u\circ v)\Pi(w)=\Pi(u)\Pi(v\circ w). \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*} u\circ v\circ w\in\mathbf{D}\implies\Pi(u\circ v)\Pi(w)=\Pi(u)\Pi(v\circ w). \end{align*} $$
- 
(c) We have  $u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
 if and only if $u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
 if and only if $u\circ (\mathbf {1})\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
, and then $u\circ (\mathbf {1})\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
, and then $=\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ (\mathbf {1})\circ v)$
. $=\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ (\mathbf {1})\circ v)$
.
- 
(d) If  $u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
, then both $u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
, then both $u^{-1}\circ u\circ v$
 and $u^{-1}\circ u\circ v$
 and $u\circ v\circ v^{-1}$
 are in $u\circ v\circ v^{-1}$
 are in $\mathbf {D}$
, $\mathbf {D}$
, $\Pi (u^{-1}\circ u\circ v)=\Pi (v)$
 and $\Pi (u^{-1}\circ u\circ v)=\Pi (v)$
 and $\Pi (u\circ v\circ v^{-1})=\Pi (u)$
. $\Pi (u\circ v\circ v^{-1})=\Pi (u)$
.
- 
(e) The cancellation rule: If both  $u\circ v$
 and $u\circ v$
 and $u\circ w$
 are in $u\circ w$
 are in $\mathbf {D}$
, and $\mathbf {D}$
, and $\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ w)$
, then $\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ w)$
, then $\Pi (v)=\Pi (w)$
 (and similarly for right cancellation). $\Pi (v)=\Pi (w)$
 (and similarly for right cancellation).
- 
(f) If  $u\in \mathbf {D}$
, then $u\in \mathbf {D}$
, then $u^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $u^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $\Pi (u^{-1})=\Pi (u)^{-1}$
. In particular, $\Pi (u^{-1})=\Pi (u)^{-1}$
. In particular, $\mathbf {1}^{-1}=\mathbf {1}$
. $\mathbf {1}^{-1}=\mathbf {1}$
.
- 
(g) The uncancellation rule: Suppose that both  $u\circ v$
 and $u\circ v$
 and $u\circ w$
 are in $u\circ w$
 are in $\mathbf {D}$
 and that $\mathbf {D}$
 and that $\Pi (v)=\Pi (w)$
. Then $\Pi (v)=\Pi (w)$
. Then $\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ w)$
. $\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ w)$
. $($
 Similarly for right uncancellation. $($
 Similarly for right uncancellation. $)$ $)$
Proof. Let 
 $u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then Definition 1.1(3) applies to
$u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then Definition 1.1(3) applies to 
 $(\emptyset )\circ u\circ v$
 and yields
$(\emptyset )\circ u\circ v$
 and yields 
 $(\Pi (u))\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
 with
$(\Pi (u))\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
 with 
 $\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi ((\Pi (u))\circ v)$
. Now apply Definition 1.1(3) to
$\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi ((\Pi (u))\circ v)$
. Now apply Definition 1.1(3) to 
 $(\Pi (u))\circ v\circ (\emptyset )$
 to obtain (a).
$(\Pi (u))\circ v\circ (\emptyset )$
 to obtain (a).
 Let 
 $u\circ v\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then
$u\circ v\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then 
 $u\circ v$
 and w are in
$u\circ v$
 and w are in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(1), and
$\mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(1), and 
 $\mathbf {D}$
-multiplicativity yields
$\mathbf {D}$
-multiplicativity yields 
 $\Pi (u\circ v\circ w)=\Pi (u\circ v)\Pi (w)$
. Similarly,
$\Pi (u\circ v\circ w)=\Pi (u\circ v)\Pi (w)$
. Similarly, 
 $\Pi (u\circ v\circ w)=\Pi (u)\Pi (v\circ w)$
, and (b) holds.
$\Pi (u\circ v\circ w)=\Pi (u)\Pi (v\circ w)$
, and (b) holds.
 Since 
 $\mathbf {1}=\Pi (\emptyset )$
, it is immediate from Definition 1.1(3) that if
$\mathbf {1}=\Pi (\emptyset )$
, it is immediate from Definition 1.1(3) that if 
 $w=u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
, then
$w=u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
, then 
 $w'=u\circ (\mathbf {1})\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
. On the other hand, suppose that
$w'=u\circ (\mathbf {1})\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
. On the other hand, suppose that 
 $w'\in \mathbf {D}$
. If u and v are empty, then
$w'\in \mathbf {D}$
. If u and v are empty, then 
 $w=(\emptyset )\in \mathbf {D}$
. Suppose u is not the empty word, and write
$w=(\emptyset )\in \mathbf {D}$
. Suppose u is not the empty word, and write 
 $u=u_0\circ (x)$
. Then
$u=u_0\circ (x)$
. Then 
 $w'=u_0\circ (x,\mathbf {1})\circ v$
, and since
$w'=u_0\circ (x,\mathbf {1})\circ v$
, and since 
 $\Pi (x,\mathbf {1})=x$
, we obtain
$\Pi (x,\mathbf {1})=x$
, we obtain 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. Similarly,
$\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. Similarly, 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 if v is nonempty, so (c) holds.
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 if v is nonempty, so (c) holds.
 Let 
 $u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then
$u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then 
 $v^{-1}\circ u^{-1}\circ u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(4), and then
$v^{-1}\circ u^{-1}\circ u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(4), and then 
 $u^{-1}\circ u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(1). Multiplicativity then yields
$u^{-1}\circ u\circ v\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(1). Multiplicativity then yields 
 $$ \begin{align*} \Pi(u^{-1}\circ u\circ v)=\Pi(u^{-1}\circ u)\Pi(v)=\mathbf{1}\Pi(v)= \Pi(\emptyset)\Pi(v)=\Pi(\emptyset\circ v)=\Pi(v). \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} \Pi(u^{-1}\circ u\circ v)=\Pi(u^{-1}\circ u)\Pi(v)=\mathbf{1}\Pi(v)= \Pi(\emptyset)\Pi(v)=\Pi(\emptyset\circ v)=\Pi(v). \end{align*} $$
As 
 $(w^{-1})^{-1}=w$
 for any
$(w^{-1})^{-1}=w$
 for any 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}$
, one obtains
$w\in \mathbf {W}$
, one obtains 
 $w\circ w^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
 for any
$w\circ w^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
 for any 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and 
 $\Pi (w\circ w^{-1})=\mathbf {1}$
. From this one easily completes the proof of (d).
$\Pi (w\circ w^{-1})=\mathbf {1}$
. From this one easily completes the proof of (d).
 Now let 
 $u\circ v$
 and
$u\circ v$
 and 
 $u\circ w$
 be in
$u\circ w$
 be in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
, with
$\mathbf {D}$
, with 
 $\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ w)$
. Then (d) (together with multiplicativity and associativity, which will not be explicitly mentioned hereafter) yield
$\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ w)$
. Then (d) (together with multiplicativity and associativity, which will not be explicitly mentioned hereafter) yield 
 $$ \begin{align*}\Pi(v)=\Pi(u^{-1}\circ u\circ v)=\Pi(u^{-1})\Pi(u)\Pi(v)=\Pi(u^{-1})\Pi(u)\Pi(w)= \Pi(u^{-1}\circ u\circ w)=\Pi(w), \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}\Pi(v)=\Pi(u^{-1}\circ u\circ v)=\Pi(u^{-1})\Pi(u)\Pi(v)=\Pi(u^{-1})\Pi(u)\Pi(w)= \Pi(u^{-1}\circ u\circ w)=\Pi(w), \end{align*} $$
and (e) holds.
 Let 
 $u\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then
$u\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then 
 $u\circ u^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
, and then
$u\circ u^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
, and then 
 $\Pi (u)\Pi (u^{-1})=\mathbf {1}$
. But also
$\Pi (u)\Pi (u^{-1})=\mathbf {1}$
. But also 
 $(\Pi (u),\Pi (u)^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
, and
$(\Pi (u),\Pi (u)^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
, and 
 $\Pi (u)\Pi (u)^{-1}=\mathbf {1}$
. Now (f) follows by Definition 1.1(2) and cancellation.
$\Pi (u)\Pi (u)^{-1}=\mathbf {1}$
. Now (f) follows by Definition 1.1(2) and cancellation.
 Let 
 $u,v,w$
 be as in (g). Then
$u,v,w$
 be as in (g). Then 
 $u^{-1}\circ u\circ v$
 and
$u^{-1}\circ u\circ v$
 and 
 $u^{-1}\circ u\circ w$
 are in
$u^{-1}\circ u\circ w$
 are in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 by (d). By two applications of (d),
$\mathbf {D}$
 by (d). By two applications of (d), 
 $\Pi (u^{-1}\circ u\circ v)=\Pi (v)=\Pi (w)=\Pi (u^{-1}\circ u\circ w)$
, so
$\Pi (u^{-1}\circ u\circ v)=\Pi (v)=\Pi (w)=\Pi (u^{-1}\circ u\circ w)$
, so 
 $\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ w)$
 by (e), and (g) holds.
$\Pi (u\circ v)=\Pi (u\circ w)$
 by (e), and (g) holds.
 It will often be convenient to eliminate the symbol ‘
 $\Pi $
’ and speak of ‘the product
$\Pi $
’ and speak of ‘the product 
 $g_1\cdots g_n$
’ instead of
$g_1\cdots g_n$
’ instead of 
 $\Pi (g_1,\cdots ,g_n)$
. More generally, if
$\Pi (g_1,\cdots ,g_n)$
. More generally, if 
 $\{X_i\}_{1\leq i\leq n}$
 is a collection of subsets of
$\{X_i\}_{1\leq i\leq n}$
 is a collection of subsets of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, then the ‘product set
$\mathcal {L}$
, then the ‘product set 
 $X_1\cdots X_n$
’ is by definition the image under
$X_1\cdots X_n$
’ is by definition the image under 
 $\Pi $
 of the set of words
$\Pi $
 of the set of words 
 $(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
 such that
$(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
 such that 
 $g_i\in X_i$
 for all i. If
$g_i\in X_i$
 for all i. If 
 $X_i=\{g_i\}$
 is a singleton, then we may write
$X_i=\{g_i\}$
 is a singleton, then we may write 
 $g_i$
 in place of
$g_i$
 in place of 
 $X_i$
 in such a product. Thus, for example, the product
$X_i$
 in such a product. Thus, for example, the product 
 $g^{-1} Xg$
 stands for the set of all
$g^{-1} Xg$
 stands for the set of all 
 $\Pi (g^{-1},x,g)$
 with
$\Pi (g^{-1},x,g)$
 with 
 $(g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and with
$(g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and with 
 $x\in X$
.
$x\in X$
.
 
A word of urgent warning: In writing products in the above way, one may be drawn into imagining that associativity holds in a stronger sense than that given by Lemma 1.4(b). This is an error that is to be avoided. For example, one should not suppose that if 
 $(f,g,h)\in \mathbf {W}$
 and both
$(f,g,h)\in \mathbf {W}$
 and both 
 $(f,g)$
 and
$(f,g)$
 and 
 $(fg,h)$
 are in
$(fg,h)$
 are in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
, then
$\mathbf {D}$
, then 
 $(f,g,h)$
 is in
$(f,g,h)$
 is in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
. That is, ‘the product
$\mathbf {D}$
. That is, ‘the product 
 $fgh$
’ may be undefined even though the product
$fgh$
’ may be undefined even though the product 
 $(fg)h$
 is defined. Of course, one is tempted to simply extend the domain
$(fg)h$
 is defined. Of course, one is tempted to simply extend the domain 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 to include such triples
$\mathbf {D}$
 to include such triples 
 $(f,g,h)$
 and ‘define’ the product
$(f,g,h)$
 and ‘define’ the product 
 $fgh$
 to be
$fgh$
 to be 
 $(fg)h$
. The trouble is that it may also be the case that
$(fg)h$
. The trouble is that it may also be the case that 
 $gh$
 and
$gh$
 and 
 $f(gh)$
 are defined but
$f(gh)$
 are defined but 
 $(fg)h\neq f(gh)$
.
$(fg)h\neq f(gh)$
.
 For 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 a partial group and
$\mathcal {L}$
 a partial group and 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, write
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
, write 
 $\mathbf {D}(g)$
 for the set of all
$\mathbf {D}(g)$
 for the set of all 
 $x\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that the product
$x\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that the product 
 $g^{-1} xg$
 is defined. There is then a mapping
$g^{-1} xg$
 is defined. There is then a mapping 
 $$ \begin{align*} c_g:\mathbf{D}(g)\to\mathcal{L} \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} c_g:\mathbf{D}(g)\to\mathcal{L} \end{align*} $$
given by 
 $x\mapsto g^{-1} xg$
 (and called conjugation by g). Our preference is for right-hand notation for mappings, so we write
$x\mapsto g^{-1} xg$
 (and called conjugation by g). Our preference is for right-hand notation for mappings, so we write 
 $$ \begin{align*} x\mapsto(x)c_g\quad\text{or}\quad x\mapsto x^g \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} x\mapsto(x)c_g\quad\text{or}\quad x\mapsto x^g \end{align*} $$
for conjugation by g.
The following result provides an illustration of the preceding notational conventions and introduces a theme that will be developed further as we pass from partial groups to objective partial groups, localities and (in Part III) regular localities.
Lemma 1.5. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group, and let
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group, and let 
 $f,g\in \mathcal {L}$
.
$f,g\in \mathcal {L}$
. 
- 
(a) Suppose that the products  $fg$
 and $fg$
 and $gf$
 are defined and that $gf$
 are defined and that $fg=gf$
. Suppose further that $fg=gf$
. Suppose further that $f\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
. Then $f\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
. Then $f^g=f$
. $f^g=f$
.
- 
(b) Suppose that  $f\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
 and $f\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
 and $f^g=f$
. Then $f^g=f$
. Then $g\in \mathbf {D}(f)$
, $g\in \mathbf {D}(f)$
, $fg=gf$
 and $fg=gf$
 and $g^f=g$
. $g^f=g$
.
Proof.
- 
(a) We are given  $(f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, so $(f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, so $(f^{-1},f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 and $(f^{-1},f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 and $\Pi (f^{-1},f,g)=g$
, by Lemma 1.4(d) and $\Pi (f^{-1},f,g)=g$
, by Lemma 1.4(d) and $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. We are also given $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. We are also given $f\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
 and $f\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
 and $fg=gf$
, so $fg=gf$
, so $$ \begin{align*}f^g=\Pi(g^{-1},f,g)=\Pi((g^{-1},fg)=\Pi(g^{-1},gf)=\Pi(g^{-1},g,f)=f. \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*}f^g=\Pi(g^{-1},f,g)=\Pi((g^{-1},fg)=\Pi(g^{-1},gf)=\Pi(g^{-1},g,f)=f. \end{align*} $$
- 
(b) Set  $v=(f^{-1},g,g^{-1},f,g)$
. As $v=(f^{-1},g,g^{-1},f,g)$
. As $(g^{-1},f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, it follows from Lemma 1.4(d) that also $(g^{-1},f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, it follows from Lemma 1.4(d) that also $v\in \mathbf {D}$
 and $v\in \mathbf {D}$
 and $\Pi (v)=g$
. Then $\Pi (v)=g$
. Then $(f^{-1},g,f)=(f^{-1},g,f^g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 by $(f^{-1},g,f)=(f^{-1},g,f^g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 by $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity and $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity and $\Pi (v)=g^f=g$
. Also, from $\Pi (v)=g^f=g$
. Also, from $v\in \mathbf {D}$
, we obtain $v\in \mathbf {D}$
, we obtain $(f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 from Definition 1.1(1), so $(f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 from Definition 1.1(1), so $(g,g^{-1},f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Lemma 1.4(d). Then $(g,g^{-1},f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Lemma 1.4(d). Then $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity yields $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity yields $fg=\Pi (g,g^{-1},f,g)=gf^g=gf$
. $fg=\Pi (g,g^{-1},f,g)=gf^g=gf$
.
Notation. From now on, in any given partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, usage of the symbol ‘
$\mathcal {L}$
, usage of the symbol ‘
 $x^g$
’ shall be taken to imply
$x^g$
’ shall be taken to imply 
 $x\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
. More generally, for X a subset of
$x\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
. More generally, for X a subset of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 and
$\mathcal {L}$
 and 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, usage of ‘
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
, usage of ‘
 $X^g$
’ shall be taken to mean that
$X^g$
’ shall be taken to mean that 
 $X\subseteq \mathbf {D}(g)$
, whereupon
$X\subseteq \mathbf {D}(g)$
, whereupon 
 $X^g$
 is by definition the set of all
$X^g$
 is by definition the set of all 
 $x^g$
 with
$x^g$
 with 
 $x\in X$
.
$x\in X$
.
 At this early point, and in the context of arbitrary partial groups, one can say very little about the maps 
 $c_g$
. The cancellation rule in Lemma 1.4(e) implies that each
$c_g$
. The cancellation rule in Lemma 1.4(e) implies that each 
 $c_g$
 is injective, but beyond that the following lemma may be the best that can be obtained.
$c_g$
 is injective, but beyond that the following lemma may be the best that can be obtained.
Lemma 1.6. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group, and let
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group, and let 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
. Then the following hold:
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
. Then the following hold: 
- 
(a)  $\mathbf {1}\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
, and $\mathbf {1}\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
, and ${\mathbf {1}}^g=\mathbf {1}$
. ${\mathbf {1}}^g=\mathbf {1}$
.
- 
(b)  $\mathbf {D}(g)$
 is closed under inversion, and $\mathbf {D}(g)$
 is closed under inversion, and $(x^{-1})^g=(x^g)^{-1}$
 for all $(x^{-1})^g=(x^g)^{-1}$
 for all $x\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
. $x\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
.
- 
(c)  $c_g$
 is a bijection $c_g$
 is a bijection $\mathbf {D}(g)\to \mathbf {D}(g^{-1})$
, and $\mathbf {D}(g)\to \mathbf {D}(g^{-1})$
, and $c_{g^{-1}}=(c_g)^{-1}$
. $c_{g^{-1}}=(c_g)^{-1}$
.
- 
(d)  $\mathcal {L}=\mathbf {D}(\mathbf {1})$
, and $\mathcal {L}=\mathbf {D}(\mathbf {1})$
, and $x^{\mathbf {1}}=x$
 for each $x^{\mathbf {1}}=x$
 for each $x\in \mathcal {L}$
. $x\in \mathcal {L}$
.
Proof. By Definition 1.1(4), 
 $g\circ \emptyset \circ g^{-1}=g\circ g^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
, so
$g\circ \emptyset \circ g^{-1}=g\circ g^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
, so 
 $\mathbf {1}\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
 and then
$\mathbf {1}\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
 and then 
 $\mathbf {1}^g=\mathbf {1}$
 by Lemma 1.4(c). Thus (a) holds. Now let
$\mathbf {1}^g=\mathbf {1}$
 by Lemma 1.4(c). Thus (a) holds. Now let 
 $x\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
, and set
$x\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
, and set 
 $w=(g^{-1},x,g)$
. Then
$w=(g^{-1},x,g)$
. Then 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and 
 $w^{-1}=(g^{-1},x^{-1},g)$
 by definition in Definition 1.1. Then Definition 1.1(4) yields
$w^{-1}=(g^{-1},x^{-1},g)$
 by definition in Definition 1.1. Then Definition 1.1(4) yields 
 $w^{-1}\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, so
$w^{-1}\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, so 
 $w^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(1). This shows that
$w^{-1}\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(1). This shows that 
 $\mathbf {D}(g)$
 is closed under inversion. Also, Definition 1.1(4) yields
$\mathbf {D}(g)$
 is closed under inversion. Also, Definition 1.1(4) yields 
 $\mathbf {1}=\Pi (w^{-1}\circ w)=(x^{-1})^g x^g$
, and then
$\mathbf {1}=\Pi (w^{-1}\circ w)=(x^{-1})^g x^g$
, and then 
 $(x^{-1})^g=(x^g)^{^{-1}}$
 by Lemma 1.4(f). This completes the proof of (b).
$(x^{-1})^g=(x^g)^{^{-1}}$
 by Lemma 1.4(f). This completes the proof of (b).
 As 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, Lemma 1.4(d) implies that
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
, Lemma 1.4(d) implies that 
 $g\circ w$
 and then
$g\circ w$
 and then 
 $g\circ w\circ g^{-1}$
 are in
$g\circ w\circ g^{-1}$
 are in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
. Now Definition 1.1(3) and two applications of Lemma 1.4(d) yield
$\mathbf {D}$
. Now Definition 1.1(3) and two applications of Lemma 1.4(d) yield 
 $$ \begin{align*} gx^gg^{-1}=\Pi(g,g^{-1},x,g,g^{-1})=\Pi((g,g^{-1},x)\circ g\circ g^{-1})=\Pi(g,g^{-1},x)=x. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} gx^gg^{-1}=\Pi(g,g^{-1},x,g,g^{-1})=\Pi((g,g^{-1},x)\circ g\circ g^{-1})=\Pi(g,g^{-1},x)=x. \end{align*} $$
Thus 
 $x^g\in \mathbf {D}(g^{-1})$
 with
$x^g\in \mathbf {D}(g^{-1})$
 with 
 $(x^g)^{g^{-1}}=x$
, and thus (c) holds.
$(x^g)^{g^{-1}}=x$
, and thus (c) holds.
 Finally, 
 $\mathbf {1}=\mathbf {1}^{-1}$
 by Lemma 1.4(f), and
$\mathbf {1}=\mathbf {1}^{-1}$
 by Lemma 1.4(f), and 
 $\emptyset \circ x\circ \emptyset =x\in \mathbf {D}$
 for any
$\emptyset \circ x\circ \emptyset =x\in \mathbf {D}$
 for any 
 $x\in \mathcal {L}$
, proving (d).
$x\in \mathcal {L}$
, proving (d).
Definition 1.7. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group, and let
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group, and let 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 be a nonempty subset of
$\mathcal {H}$
 be a nonempty subset of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Then
$\mathcal {L}$
. Then 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 is a partial subgroup of
$\mathcal {H}$
 is a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 (denoted
$\mathcal {L}$
 (denoted 
 $\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
) if
$\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
) if 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 is closed under inversion (
$\mathcal {H}$
 is closed under inversion (
 $g\in \mathcal {H}$
 implies
$g\in \mathcal {H}$
 implies 
 $g^{-1}\in \mathcal {H}$
) and closed with respect to products. The latter condition means, of course, that
$g^{-1}\in \mathcal {H}$
) and closed with respect to products. The latter condition means, of course, that 
 $\Pi (w)\in \mathcal {H}$
 whenever
$\Pi (w)\in \mathcal {H}$
 whenever 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\cap \mathbf {D}$
. A partial subgroup
$w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\cap \mathbf {D}$
. A partial subgroup 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 of
$\mathcal {N}$
 of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is a partial normal subgroup of
$\mathcal {L}$
 is a partial normal subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 (denoted
$\mathcal {L}$
 (denoted 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
) if
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
) if 
 $x^g\in \mathcal {N}$
 for all
$x^g\in \mathcal {N}$
 for all 
 $x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and all
$x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and all 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 for which
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 for which 
 $x\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
. We say that
$x\in \mathbf {D}(g)$
. We say that 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of
$\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 if
$\mathcal {L}$
 if 
 $\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
 and
$\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
 and 
 $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\subseteq \mathbf {D}$
.
$\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\subseteq \mathbf {D}$
.
 An equivalent way to state the condition for normality, which relies on the notational convention introduced above for interpreting product sets 
 $XYZ$
, is to say that the partial subgroup
$XYZ$
, is to say that the partial subgroup 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 of
$\mathcal {N}$
 of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is normal in
$\mathcal {L}$
 is normal in 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 if
$\mathcal {L}$
 if 
 $g^{-1}\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}$
 for all
$g^{-1}\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}$
 for all 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
.
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
.
 We leave it to the reader to check that if 
 $\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
, then
$\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
, then 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 is indeed a partial group, with
$\mathcal {H}$
 is indeed a partial group, with 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})=\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\cap \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
.
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})=\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\cap \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
.
Lemma 1.8. Let 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 and
$\mathcal {H}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {K}$
 be partial subgroups of a partial group
$\mathcal {K}$
 be partial subgroups of a partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, and let
$\mathcal {L}$
, and let 
 $\{\mathcal {H}_i\}_{i\in I}$
 be a set of partial subgroups of
$\{\mathcal {H}_i\}_{i\in I}$
 be a set of partial subgroups of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
.
- 
(a) Each partial subgroup of  $\mathcal {H}$
 is a partial subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
 is a partial subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
. $\mathcal {L}$
.
- 
(b) Each partial subgroup of  $\mathcal {L}$
 that is contained in $\mathcal {L}$
 that is contained in $\mathcal {H}$
 is a partial subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
 is a partial subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
. $\mathcal {H}$
.
- 
(c) If  $\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
, then $\mathcal {L}$
, then $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 is a subgroup of both $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 is a subgroup of both $\mathcal {H}$
 and $\mathcal {H}$
 and $\mathcal {K}$
. $\mathcal {K}$
.
- 
(d) Suppose  $\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Then $\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Then $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {H}$
. Moreover, $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {H}$
. Moreover, $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 is a normal subgroup of $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 is a normal subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
 if $\mathcal {H}$
 if $\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
. $\mathcal {L}$
.
- 
(e)  $\bigcap \{\mathcal {H}_i\mid i\in I\}$
 is a partial subgroup of $\bigcap \{\mathcal {H}_i\mid i\in I\}$
 is a partial subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
 and is a partial normal subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
 and is a partial normal subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
 if $\mathcal {L}$
 if $\mathcal {H}_i\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 for all i. $\mathcal {H}_i\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 for all i.
Proof. One observes that in all the points (a) through (e), the requisite closure with respect to inversion obtains. Thus, we need only be concerned with products.
- 
(a) Let  $\mathcal {E}\leq \mathcal {H}$
 be a partial subgroup of $\mathcal {E}\leq \mathcal {H}$
 be a partial subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
. Then and (a) follows. $\mathcal {H}$
. Then and (a) follows. $$ \begin{align*}\mathbf{D}(\mathcal{E})=\mathbf{W}(E)\cap\mathbf{D}(\mathcal{H})=\mathbf{W}(E)\cap(\mathbf{W}(\mathcal{H})\cap\mathbf{D}(\mathcal{L})= \mathbf{W}(E)\cap\mathbf{D}(\mathcal{L}), \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*}\mathbf{D}(\mathcal{E})=\mathbf{W}(E)\cap\mathbf{D}(\mathcal{H})=\mathbf{W}(E)\cap(\mathbf{W}(\mathcal{H})\cap\mathbf{D}(\mathcal{L})= \mathbf{W}(E)\cap\mathbf{D}(\mathcal{L}), \end{align*} $$
- 
(b) Suppose  $\mathcal {K}\subseteq \mathcal {H}$
, and let $\mathcal {K}\subseteq \mathcal {H}$
, and let $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {K})\cap \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})$
. As $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {K})\cap \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})$
. As $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})\leq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, and since $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})\leq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, and since $\mathcal {K}\leq \mathcal {L}$
 by hypothesis, we obtain $\mathcal {K}\leq \mathcal {L}$
 by hypothesis, we obtain $\Pi (w)\in \mathcal {K}$
. $\Pi (w)\in \mathcal {K}$
.
- 
(c) Assuming now that  $\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
, we have $\mathcal {L}$
, we have $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, and then $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, and then $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K})\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})\cap \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {K})$
, so that $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K})\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})\cap \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {K})$
, so that $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 is a subgroup of both $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 is a subgroup of both $\mathcal {H}$
 and $\mathcal {H}$
 and $\mathcal {K}$
. $\mathcal {K}$
.
- 
(d) Let  $\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and let $\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and let $x\in \mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 and $x\in \mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 and $h\in \mathcal {H}$
 with $h\in \mathcal {H}$
 with $(h^{-1},x,h)\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})$
. Then $(h^{-1},x,h)\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {H})$
. Then $(h^{-1},x,h)\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, and $(h^{-1},x,h)\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, and $x^h\in \mathcal {K}$
. As $x^h\in \mathcal {K}$
. As $\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
, we also have $\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
, we also have $x^h\in \mathcal {H}$
, so $x^h\in \mathcal {H}$
, so $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {H}$
. Now suppose further that $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {H}$
. Now suppose further that $\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
. That is, assume that $\mathcal {L}$
. That is, assume that $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
. Then $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H})\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
. Then $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K})\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, hence $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K})\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, hence $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {K}$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {H}$
 and evidently a normal subgroup. $\mathcal {H}$
 and evidently a normal subgroup.
- 
(e) Set  $\mathcal {X}=\bigcap \{\mathcal {H}_i\}_{i\in I}$
. Then $\mathcal {X}=\bigcap \{\mathcal {H}_i\}_{i\in I}$
. Then $\Pi (w)\in \mathcal {X}$
 for all $\Pi (w)\in \mathcal {X}$
 for all $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {X})\cap \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, so $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {X})\cap \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, so $\mathcal {X}\leq \mathcal {L}$
. The last part of (e) may be left to the reader. $\mathcal {X}\leq \mathcal {L}$
. The last part of (e) may be left to the reader.
 For any subset X of a partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, define the partial subgroup
$\mathcal {L}$
, define the partial subgroup 
 $\langle X\mid \mathcal {L}\,\rangle $
 of
$\langle X\mid \mathcal {L}\,\rangle $
 of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
generated by X to be the intersection of the set of all partial subgroups of
$\mathcal {L}$
generated by X to be the intersection of the set of all partial subgroups of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 containing X. Then
$\mathcal {L}$
 containing X. Then 
 $\langle X\mid \mathcal {L}\,\rangle $
 is itself a partial subgroup of
$\langle X\mid \mathcal {L}\,\rangle $
 is itself a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 by Lemma 1.8(e). In Parts I through III of this series, the ambient partial group
$\mathcal {L}$
 by Lemma 1.8(e). In Parts I through III of this series, the ambient partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 will always be understood, so we shall simply write
$\mathcal {L}$
 will always be understood, so we shall simply write 
 $\langle X\rangle $
 for
$\langle X\rangle $
 for 
 $\langle X\mid \mathcal {L}>$
.
$\langle X\mid \mathcal {L}>$
.
Lemma 1.9. Let X be a subset of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 such that X is closed under inversion. Set
$\mathcal {L}$
 such that X is closed under inversion. Set 
 $X_0=X$
, and recursively define
$X_0=X$
, and recursively define 
 $X_n$
 for
$X_n$
 for 
 $n>0$
 by
$n>0$
 by 
 $$ \begin{align*}X_n=\{\Pi(w)\mid w\in\mathbf{W}(X_{n-1})\cap\mathbf{D}\}. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}X_n=\{\Pi(w)\mid w\in\mathbf{W}(X_{n-1})\cap\mathbf{D}\}. \end{align*} $$
Then 
 $\langle X\rangle =\bigcup \{X_n\}_{n\geq 0}$
.
$\langle X\rangle =\bigcup \{X_n\}_{n\geq 0}$
.
Proof. Let Y be the union of the sets 
 $X_i$
. Each
$X_i$
. Each 
 $X_i$
 is closed under inversion by Lemma 1.4(f), and
$X_i$
 is closed under inversion by Lemma 1.4(f), and 
 $Y\neq \emptyset $
 since
$Y\neq \emptyset $
 since 
 $\mathbf {1}=\Pi (\emptyset )$
. Since Y is closed under products, by construction, we get
$\mathbf {1}=\Pi (\emptyset )$
. Since Y is closed under products, by construction, we get 
 $Y\leq \langle X\rangle $
, and then
$Y\leq \langle X\rangle $
, and then 
 $Y=\langle X\rangle $
 by the definition of
$Y=\langle X\rangle $
 by the definition of 
 $\langle X\rangle $
.
$\langle X\rangle $
.
Lemma 1.10 Dedekind lemma
 Let 
 $\mathcal {H}$
,
$\mathcal {H}$
, 
 $\mathcal {K}$
 and
$\mathcal {K}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {A}$
 be partial subgroups of a partial group
$\mathcal {A}$
 be partial subgroups of a partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
. 
- 
(a) If  $\mathcal {K}\leq \mathcal {A}$
, then $\mathcal {K}\leq \mathcal {A}$
, then $\mathcal {A}\cap \mathcal {H}\mathcal {K}=(\mathcal {A}\cap \mathcal {H})\mathcal {K}$
. $\mathcal {A}\cap \mathcal {H}\mathcal {K}=(\mathcal {A}\cap \mathcal {H})\mathcal {K}$
.
- 
(b) If  $\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {A}$
, then $\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {A}$
, then $\mathcal {A}\cap \mathcal {H}\mathcal {K}=\mathcal {H}(\mathcal {A}\cap \mathcal {K})$
. $\mathcal {A}\cap \mathcal {H}\mathcal {K}=\mathcal {H}(\mathcal {A}\cap \mathcal {K})$
.
Proof. The proof is identical to the proof for binary groups and is left to the reader.
Definition 1.11. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 and
$\mathcal {L}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {L}'$
 be partial groups, let
$\mathcal {L}'$
 be partial groups, let 
 $\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a mapping, and let
$\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a mapping, and let 
 $\beta ^*:\mathbf {W}\to \mathbf {W}'$
 be the induced mapping of free monoids. Then
$\beta ^*:\mathbf {W}\to \mathbf {W}'$
 be the induced mapping of free monoids. Then 
 $\beta $
 is a homomorphism (of partial groups) if
$\beta $
 is a homomorphism (of partial groups) if 
- 
(H1)  $\mathbf {D}\beta ^*\subseteq \mathbf {D}'$
, and $\mathbf {D}\beta ^*\subseteq \mathbf {D}'$
, and
- (H2)  $(\Pi (w))\beta =\Pi '(w\beta ^*)$
 for all $(\Pi (w))\beta =\Pi '(w\beta ^*)$
 for all $w\in \mathbf {D}$
. $w\in \mathbf {D}$
.
The kernel of 
 $\beta $
 is the set
$\beta $
 is the set 
 $Ker(\beta )$
 of all
$Ker(\beta )$
 of all 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that 
 $g\beta =\mathbf {1}'$
. We say that
$g\beta =\mathbf {1}'$
. We say that 
 $\beta $
 is an isomorphism if there exists a homomorphism
$\beta $
 is an isomorphism if there exists a homomorphism 
 $\beta ':\mathcal {L}'\to \mathcal {L}$
 such that
$\beta ':\mathcal {L}'\to \mathcal {L}$
 such that 
 $\beta \circ \beta '$
 and
$\beta \circ \beta '$
 and 
 $\beta '\circ \beta $
 are identity mappings. (Equivalently,
$\beta '\circ \beta $
 are identity mappings. (Equivalently, 
 $\beta $
 is an isomorphism if
$\beta $
 is an isomorphism if 
 $\beta $
 is bijective and
$\beta $
 is bijective and 
 $\mathbf {D}\beta =\mathbf {D}'$
.)
$\mathbf {D}\beta =\mathbf {D}'$
.)
Example 1.12. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}=\{\mathbf {1},a,b\}$
 be the partial group from Example 1.2, let
$\mathcal {L}=\{\mathbf {1},a,b\}$
 be the partial group from Example 1.2, let 
 $\mathcal {L}'$
 be any partial group, and let
$\mathcal {L}'$
 be any partial group, and let 
 $x\in \mathcal {L}'$
. Then the mapping
$x\in \mathcal {L}'$
. Then the mapping 
 $\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 given by
$\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 given by 
 $$ \begin{align*}\mathbf{1}\mapsto\mathbf{1}', \quad a\mapsto x, \quad b\mapsto x^{-1} \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}\mathbf{1}\mapsto\mathbf{1}', \quad a\mapsto x, \quad b\mapsto x^{-1} \end{align*} $$
is a homomorphism. In fact, 
 $\beta $
 is the unique homomorphism
$\beta $
 is the unique homomorphism 
 $\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
, which maps a to x, by the following lemma. Thus,
$\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
, which maps a to x, by the following lemma. Thus, 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is the (unique up to a unique invertible homomorphism) free partial group on one generator. Free partial groups in general can be obtained as ‘free products’ of copies of
$\mathcal {L}$
 is the (unique up to a unique invertible homomorphism) free partial group on one generator. Free partial groups in general can be obtained as ‘free products’ of copies of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 (see Appendix A).
$\mathcal {L}$
 (see Appendix A).
Lemma 1.13. Let 
 $\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a homomorphism of partial groups. Then
$\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a homomorphism of partial groups. Then 
 $\mathbf {1}\beta =\mathbf {1}'$
, and
$\mathbf {1}\beta =\mathbf {1}'$
, and 
 $(g^{-1})\beta =(g\beta )^{-1}$
 for all
$(g^{-1})\beta =(g\beta )^{-1}$
 for all 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
.
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
.
Proof. Since 
 $\mathbf {1} \mathbf {1}=\mathbf {1}$
, (H1) and (H2) yield
$\mathbf {1} \mathbf {1}=\mathbf {1}$
, (H1) and (H2) yield 
 $\mathbf {1}\beta =(\mathbf {1}\mathbf {1})\beta =(\mathbf {1}\beta )(\mathbf {1}\beta )$
, and then
$\mathbf {1}\beta =(\mathbf {1}\mathbf {1})\beta =(\mathbf {1}\beta )(\mathbf {1}\beta )$
, and then 
 $\mathbf {1}\beta =\mathbf {1}'$
 by left or right cancellation. Since
$\mathbf {1}\beta =\mathbf {1}'$
 by left or right cancellation. Since 
 $(g,g^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 for any
$(g,g^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 for any 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 by Lemma 1.4(d), (H1) yields
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 by Lemma 1.4(d), (H1) yields 
 $(g\beta ,(g^{-1})\beta )\in \mathbf {D}'$
, and then
$(g\beta ,(g^{-1})\beta )\in \mathbf {D}'$
, and then 
 $\mathbf {1}\beta =(gg^{-1})\beta =(g\beta )((g^{-1})\beta )$
 by (H2). As
$\mathbf {1}\beta =(gg^{-1})\beta =(g\beta )((g^{-1})\beta )$
 by (H2). As 
 $\mathbf {1}\beta =\mathbf {1}'=(g\beta )(g\beta )^{-1}$
, left cancellation yields
$\mathbf {1}\beta =\mathbf {1}'=(g\beta )(g\beta )^{-1}$
, left cancellation yields 
 $(g^{-1})\beta =(g\beta )^{-1}$
.
$(g^{-1})\beta =(g\beta )^{-1}$
.
Lemma 1.14. Let 
 $\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a homomorphism of partial groups, and set
$\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a homomorphism of partial groups, and set 
 $\mathcal {N}=Ker(\beta )$
. Then
$\mathcal {N}=Ker(\beta )$
. Then 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial normal subgroup of
$\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial normal subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
.
Proof. By Lemma 1.13, 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 is closed under inversion. For w in
$\mathcal {N}$
 is closed under inversion. For w in 
 $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {N})\cap \mathbf {D}$
, the map
$\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {N})\cap \mathbf {D}$
, the map 
 $\beta ^*:\mathbf {W}\to \mathbf {W}'$
 sends w to a word of the form
$\beta ^*:\mathbf {W}\to \mathbf {W}'$
 sends w to a word of the form 
 $(\mathbf {1}',\cdots ,\mathbf {1}')$
. Then
$(\mathbf {1}',\cdots ,\mathbf {1}')$
. Then 
 $\Pi '(w\beta ^*)=\mathbf {1}'$
 by Lemma 1.4(c), and thus
$\Pi '(w\beta ^*)=\mathbf {1}'$
 by Lemma 1.4(c), and thus 
 $\Pi (w)\in \mathcal {N}$
 and
$\Pi (w)\in \mathcal {N}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial subgroup of
$\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Now let
$\mathcal {L}$
. Now let 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let 
 $g\in \mathcal {N}\cap \mathbf {D}(f)$
. Then
$g\in \mathcal {N}\cap \mathbf {D}(f)$
. Then 
 $$ \begin{align*} (f^{-1},g,f)\beta^*=((f\beta)^{-1},{\mathbf{1}}',f\beta) \quad\text{(by Lemma 1.13)}, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} (f^{-1},g,f)\beta^*=((f\beta)^{-1},{\mathbf{1}}',f\beta) \quad\text{(by Lemma 1.13)}, \end{align*} $$
so that
 $$ \begin{align*} (g^f)\beta=\Pi'((f^{-1},g,f)\beta^*)=\Pi'((f\beta)^{-1},\mathbf{1}',f\beta)=\mathbf{1}' \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} (g^f)\beta=\Pi'((f^{-1},g,f)\beta^*)=\Pi'((f\beta)^{-1},\mathbf{1}',f\beta)=\mathbf{1}' \end{align*} $$
(again using Lemma 1.4(c)). Thus 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
It will be shown later (compare Theorem 4.6) that partial normal subgroups of ‘localities’ are always kernels of homomorphisms.
Lemma 1.15. Let 
 $\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a homomorphism of partial groups, and let M be a subgroup of
$\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a homomorphism of partial groups, and let M be a subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Then
$\mathcal {L}$
. Then 
 $M\beta $
 is a subgroup of
$M\beta $
 is a subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}'$
.
$\mathcal {L}'$
.
Proof. We are given 
 $\mathbf {W}(M)\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, so
$\mathbf {W}(M)\subseteq \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, so 
 $\beta ^*$
 maps
$\beta ^*$
 maps 
 $\mathbf {W}(M)$
 into
$\mathbf {W}(M)$
 into 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}')$
.
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}')$
.
Lemma 1.16. Let G and 
 $G'$
 be groups (and hence also binary groups in the sense of Lemma 1.3). A map
$G'$
 be groups (and hence also binary groups in the sense of Lemma 1.3). A map 
 $\alpha :G\to G'$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups if and only if
$\alpha :G\to G'$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups if and only if 
 $\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of binary groups.
$\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of binary groups.
Proof. We leave to the reader the proof that if 
 $\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups, then
$\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups, then 
 $\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of binary groups. Now suppose that
$\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of binary groups. Now suppose that 
 $\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of binary groups. As
$\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of binary groups. As 
 $\mathbf {W}(G)=\mathbf {D}(G)$
 (and similarly for
$\mathbf {W}(G)=\mathbf {D}(G)$
 (and similarly for 
 $G'$
), it is immediate that
$G'$
), it is immediate that 
 $\alpha ^*$
 maps
$\alpha ^*$
 maps 
 $\mathbf {D}(G)$
 into
$\mathbf {D}(G)$
 into 
 $\mathbf {D}(G)$
. Assume that
$\mathbf {D}(G)$
. Assume that 
 $\alpha $
 is not a homomorphism of partial groups, and let
$\alpha $
 is not a homomorphism of partial groups, and let 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}(G)$
 be of minimal length subject to
$w\in \mathbf {D}(G)$
 be of minimal length subject to 
 $\Pi '(w\alpha ^*)\neq (\Pi (w))\alpha $
. Then
$\Pi '(w\alpha ^*)\neq (\Pi (w))\alpha $
. Then 
 $n>1$
, and we can write
$n>1$
, and we can write 
 $w=u\circ v$
 with both u and v nonempty. Then
$w=u\circ v$
 with both u and v nonempty. Then 
 $$ \begin{align*}\Pi'(w\alpha^*)=\Pi'(u\alpha^*\circ v\alpha^*)=\Pi'(u\alpha^*)\Pi'(v\alpha^*)=((\Pi(u))\alpha)((\Pi(v))\alpha)=(\Pi(u)\Pi(v))\alpha, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}\Pi'(w\alpha^*)=\Pi'(u\alpha^*\circ v\alpha^*)=\Pi'(u\alpha^*)\Pi'(v\alpha^*)=((\Pi(u))\alpha)((\Pi(v))\alpha)=(\Pi(u)\Pi(v))\alpha, \end{align*} $$
as 
 $\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of binary groups. Since
$\alpha $
 is a homomorphism of binary groups. Since 
 $(\Pi (u)\Pi (v))\alpha =(\Pi (w))\alpha $
, the proof is complete.
$(\Pi (u)\Pi (v))\alpha =(\Pi (w))\alpha $
, the proof is complete.
2 Objective partial groups and localities
 Recall the convention: if X is a subset of the partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, and
$\mathcal {L}$
, and 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, then any statement involving the expression ‘
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
, then any statement involving the expression ‘
 $X^g$
’ is to be understood as carrying the assumption that
$X^g$
’ is to be understood as carrying the assumption that 
 $X\subseteq \mathbf {D}(g)$
. Thus, the statement ‘
$X\subseteq \mathbf {D}(g)$
. Thus, the statement ‘
 $X^g=Y$
’ means
$X^g=Y$
’ means 
 $(g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 for all
$(g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 for all 
 $x\in X$
, and Y is the set of products
$x\in X$
, and Y is the set of products 
 $g^{-1} xg$
 with
$g^{-1} xg$
 with 
 $x\in X$
.
$x\in X$
.
Definition 2.1. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group. For any collection
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group. For any collection 
 $\Delta $
 of subgroups of
$\Delta $
 of subgroups of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, define
$\mathcal {L}$
, define 
 $\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
 to be the set of all
$\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
 to be the set of all 
 $w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 such that
$w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 such that 
- 
(*) there exists  $(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\Delta )$
 with $(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\Delta )$
 with $(X_{i-1})^{g_i}=X_i$
 for all i ( $(X_{i-1})^{g_i}=X_i$
 for all i ( $1\leq i\leq n$
). $1\leq i\leq n$
).
Then 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is objective if there exists a set
$\mathcal {L}$
 is objective if there exists a set 
 $\Delta $
 of subgroups of
$\Delta $
 of subgroups of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 such that the following two conditions hold:
$\mathcal {L}$
 such that the following two conditions hold: 
- 
(O1)  $\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {D}_{\Delta }$
. $\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {D}_{\Delta }$
.
- (O2) Whenever X and Y are in  $\Delta $
 and $\Delta $
 and $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that $X^g$
 is a subgroup of Y, then every subgroup of Y containing $X^g$
 is a subgroup of Y, then every subgroup of Y containing $X^g$
 is in $X^g$
 is in $\Delta $
. $\Delta $
.
We also say that 
 $\Delta $
 is a set of objects for
$\Delta $
 is a set of objects for 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 if (O1) and (O2) hold.
$\mathcal {L}$
 if (O1) and (O2) hold.
 It will often be convenient to somewhat over-emphasise the role of 
 $\Delta $
 in the above definition by saying that ‘
$\Delta $
 in the above definition by saying that ‘
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 is an objective partial group’. By this, we mean
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 is an objective partial group’. By this, we mean 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is an objective partial group and
$\mathcal {L}$
 is an objective partial group and 
 $\Delta $
 is a set (there will often be more than one) of objects for
$\Delta $
 is a set (there will often be more than one) of objects for 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
.
 We mention that the condition (O2) requires more than that 
 $X^g$
 be a subset of Y in order to conclude that overgroups of X in Y are objects. This is a nonvacuous distinction, since the conjugation map
$X^g$
 be a subset of Y in order to conclude that overgroups of X in Y are objects. This is a nonvacuous distinction, since the conjugation map 
 $c_g:X\to X^g$
 need not send X to a subgroup of
$c_g:X\to X^g$
 need not send X to a subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 in a general partial group.
$\mathcal {L}$
 in a general partial group.
Example 2.2. Let G be a group, let S be a subgroup of G, and let 
 $\Delta $
 be a collection of subgroups of S such that
$\Delta $
 be a collection of subgroups of S such that 
 $S\in \Delta $
. Assume that
$S\in \Delta $
. Assume that 
 $\Delta $
 satisfies (O2). That is, assume that
$\Delta $
 satisfies (O2). That is, assume that 
 $Y\in \Delta $
 for every subgroup Y of S such that
$Y\in \Delta $
 for every subgroup Y of S such that 
 $X^g\leq Y$
 for some
$X^g\leq Y$
 for some 
 $X\in \Delta $
 and some
$X\in \Delta $
 and some 
 $g\in G$
. Let
$g\in G$
. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be the set of all
$\mathcal {L}$
 be the set of all 
 $g\in G$
 such that
$g\in G$
 such that 
 $S\cap S^g\in \Delta $
, and let
$S\cap S^g\in \Delta $
, and let 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 be the subset
$\mathbf {D}$
 be the subset 
 $\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
 of
$\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
 of 
 $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
. Then
$\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
. Then 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is a partial group (via the multivariable product in G and the inversion in G), and
$\mathcal {L}$
 is a partial group (via the multivariable product in G and the inversion in G), and 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 is an objective partial group. Specifically,
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 is an objective partial group. Specifically, 
- 
(a) If  $\Delta =\{S\}$
, then $\Delta =\{S\}$
, then $\mathcal {L}=N_G(S)$
 (so $\mathcal {L}=N_G(S)$
 (so $\mathcal {L}$
 is a group in this case). $\mathcal {L}$
 is a group in this case).
- 
(b) Take  $G=O_4^+(2)$
. Thus, G is a semidirect product $G=O_4^+(2)$
. Thus, G is a semidirect product $V\rtimes S$
, where V is elementary abelian of order 9 and S is a dihedral group of order 8 acting faithfully on V. Let $V\rtimes S$
, where V is elementary abelian of order 9 and S is a dihedral group of order 8 acting faithfully on V. Let $\Delta $
 be the set of all nonidentity subgroups of S. One may check that $\Delta $
 be the set of all nonidentity subgroups of S. One may check that $S\cap S^g\in \Delta $
 for all $S\cap S^g\in \Delta $
 for all $g\in G$
, and hence $g\in G$
, and hence $\mathcal {L}=G$
 (as sets). But $\mathcal {L}=G$
 (as sets). But $\mathcal {L}$
 is not a group, as $\mathcal {L}$
 is not a group, as $\mathbf {D}_\Delta \neq \mathbf {W}(G)$
. $\mathbf {D}_\Delta \neq \mathbf {W}(G)$
.
- 
(c) Take  $G=GL_3(2)$
 and $G=GL_3(2)$
 and $S\in Syl_2(G)$
, and let $S\in Syl_2(G)$
, and let $M_1$
 and $M_1$
 and $M_2$
 be the two maximal subgroups of G containing S. Set $M_2$
 be the two maximal subgroups of G containing S. Set $P_i=O_2(M_i)$
, and set $P_i=O_2(M_i)$
, and set $\Delta =\{S,P_1,P_2\}$
. Then $\Delta =\{S,P_1,P_2\}$
. Then $\mathcal {L}=M_1\cup M_2$
 (in fact the ‘free amalgamated product’ of $\mathcal {L}=M_1\cup M_2$
 (in fact the ‘free amalgamated product’ of $M_1$
 and $M_1$
 and $M_2$
 over S in the category of partial groups). On the other hand, if $M_2$
 over S in the category of partial groups). On the other hand, if $\Delta $
 is taken to be the set of all nonidentity subgroups of S, then $\Delta $
 is taken to be the set of all nonidentity subgroups of S, then $\mathcal {L}$
 is somewhat more complicated. Its underlying set is $\mathcal {L}$
 is somewhat more complicated. Its underlying set is $M_1M_2\cup M_2M_1$
. $M_1M_2\cup M_2M_1$
.
 In an objective partial group 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
, we say that the word
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
, we say that the word 
 $w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)$
 is in
$w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)$
 is in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 via
$\mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)$
 if the condition (*) in Definition 2.1 applies specifically to w and
$(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)$
 if the condition (*) in Definition 2.1 applies specifically to w and 
 $(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)$
. We may also say, more simply, that w is in
$(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)$
. We may also say, more simply, that w is in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 via
$\mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $X_0$
, since the sequence
$X_0$
, since the sequence 
 $(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)$
 is determined by w and
$(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)$
 is determined by w and 
 $X_0$
.
$X_0$
.
 For any partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 and subgroups
$\mathcal {L}$
 and subgroups 
 $X,Y$
 of
$X,Y$
 of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, set
$\mathcal {L}$
, set 
 $$ \begin{align*} N_{\mathcal{L}}(X,Y)=\{g\in\mathcal{L}\mid X\subseteq\mathbf{D}(g),\ X^g\subseteq Y\}, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} N_{\mathcal{L}}(X,Y)=\{g\in\mathcal{L}\mid X\subseteq\mathbf{D}(g),\ X^g\subseteq Y\}, \end{align*} $$
and set
 $$ \begin{align*} N_{\mathcal{L}}(X)=\{g\in\mathcal{L}\mid X^g=X\}. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} N_{\mathcal{L}}(X)=\{g\in\mathcal{L}\mid X^g=X\}. \end{align*} $$
Lemma 2.3. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 be an objective partial group.
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 be an objective partial group. 
- 
(a)  $N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)$
 is a subgroup of $N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)$
 is a subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
 for each $\mathcal {L}$
 for each $X\in \Delta $
. $X\in \Delta $
.
- 
(b) Let  $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let $X\in \Delta $
 with $X\in \Delta $
 with $Y:=X^g\in \Delta $
. Then $Y:=X^g\in \Delta $
. Then $N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)\subseteq \mathbf {D}(g)$
, and is an isomorphism of groups. More generally, $N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)\subseteq \mathbf {D}(g)$
, and is an isomorphism of groups. More generally, $$ \begin{align*}c_g:N_{\mathcal{L}}(X)\to N_{\mathcal{L}}(Y) \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*}c_g:N_{\mathcal{L}}(X)\to N_{\mathcal{L}}(Y) \end{align*} $$
- 
(c) Let  $w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)$
. Then as isomorphisms from $(X_0,\cdots ,X_n)$
. Then as isomorphisms from $$ \begin{align*}c_{g_1}\circ\cdots\circ c_{g_n}=c_{\Pi(w)} \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*}c_{g_1}\circ\cdots\circ c_{g_n}=c_{\Pi(w)} \end{align*} $$ $N_G(X_0)$
 to $N_G(X_0)$
 to $N_G(X_n)$
. $N_G(X_n)$
.
Proof.
- 
(a) Let  $X\in \Delta $
, and let $X\in \Delta $
, and let $u\in \mathbf {W}(N_{\mathcal {L}}(X))$
. Then $u\in \mathbf {W}(N_{\mathcal {L}}(X))$
. Then $u\in \mathbf {D}$
 via X, $u\in \mathbf {D}$
 via X, $\mathbf {1}\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)$
 (Lemma 1.6(d)), and $\mathbf {1}\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)$
 (Lemma 1.6(d)), and $N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)^{-1}=N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)$
 (Lemma 1.6(c)). $N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)^{-1}=N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)$
 (Lemma 1.6(c)).
- 
(b) Let  $x,y\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)$
, and set $x,y\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)$
, and set $v=(g^{-1},x,g,g^{-1},y,g)$
. Then (with assistance from Lemma 1.6(c)) $v=(g^{-1},x,g,g^{-1},y,g)$
. Then (with assistance from Lemma 1.6(c)) $v\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Y, and then $v\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Y, and then $\Pi (v)=(xy)^g=x^gy^g$
 (using points (a) and (b) of Lemma 1.4). Thus, the conjugation map $\Pi (v)=(xy)^g=x^gy^g$
 (using points (a) and (b) of Lemma 1.4). Thus, the conjugation map $c_g:N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)\to N_{\mathcal {L}}(Y)$
 is a homomorphism of binary groups (see Lemma 1.3). Since $c_g:N_{\mathcal {L}}(X)\to N_{\mathcal {L}}(Y)$
 is a homomorphism of binary groups (see Lemma 1.3). Since $c_{g^{-1}}=c_g^{-1}$
 by Lemma 1.6(c), $c_{g^{-1}}=c_g^{-1}$
 by Lemma 1.6(c), $c_g$
 is an isomorphism of groups. $c_g$
 is an isomorphism of groups.
- 
(c) Let  $x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(X_0)$
, set $x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(X_0)$
, set $u_x=w^{-1}\circ (x)\circ w$
 and observe (using Lemma 1.6(c)) that $u_x=w^{-1}\circ (x)\circ w$
 and observe (using Lemma 1.6(c)) that $u_x\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $u_x\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $X_n$
. Then $X_n$
. Then $\Pi (u_x)$
 can be written as $\Pi (u_x)$
 can be written as $(\cdots (x)^{g_1}\cdots )^{g_n}$
, and this yields (c). $(\cdots (x)^{g_1}\cdots )^{g_n}$
, and this yields (c).
The next lemma provides two basic computational tools.
Lemma 2.4. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 be an objective partial group.
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 be an objective partial group. 
- 
(a) Let  $(a,b,c)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and set $(a,b,c)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and set $d=abc$
. Then $d=abc$
. Then $bc=a^{-1} d$
 and $bc=a^{-1} d$
 and $ab=dc^{-1}$
 (and all of these products are defined). $ab=dc^{-1}$
 (and all of these products are defined).
- 
(b) Let  $(f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and let $(f,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and let $X\in \Delta $
. Suppose that both $X\in \Delta $
. Suppose that both $X^f$
 and $X^f$
 and $X^{fg}$
 are in $X^{fg}$
 are in $\Delta $
. Then $\Delta $
. Then $X^{fg}=(X^f)^g$
. $X^{fg}=(X^f)^g$
.
Proof. Point (a) is a fact concerning partial groups in general and is immediate from Lemma 1.4(c). Now consider the setup in (b). As 
 $(f,g)\in \Delta $
, we also have
$(f,g)\in \Delta $
, we also have 
 $(f^{-1},f,g)\in \Delta $
 and
$(f^{-1},f,g)\in \Delta $
 and 
 $g=\Pi (f^{-1},f,g)=f^{-1}(fg)$
. Now observe that
$g=\Pi (f^{-1},f,g)=f^{-1}(fg)$
. Now observe that 
 $(f^{-1},fg)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$(f^{-1},fg)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $P^f$
, and apply Lemma 2.3(c) to obtain
$P^f$
, and apply Lemma 2.3(c) to obtain 
 $X^{fg}=((X^f)^{f^{-1}})^{fg}=(X^f)^g$
.
$X^{fg}=((X^f)^{f^{-1}})^{fg}=(X^f)^g$
.
The following result and its corollary are fundamental to the entire enterprise. The proof given here is due to Bernd Stellmacher.
Proposition 2.5. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 be an objective partial group. Suppose that
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 be an objective partial group. Suppose that 
 $\Delta $
 is a collection of subgroups of some
$\Delta $
 is a collection of subgroups of some 
 $S\in \Delta $
. For each
$S\in \Delta $
. For each 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, define
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
, define 
 $S_g$
 to be the set of all
$S_g$
 to be the set of all 
 $x\in \mathbf {D}(g)\cap S$
 such that
$x\in \mathbf {D}(g)\cap S$
 such that 
 $x^g\in S$
. Then
$x^g\in S$
. Then 
- 
(a)  $S_g\in \Delta $
. In particular, $S_g\in \Delta $
. In particular, $S_g$
 is a subgroup of S. $S_g$
 is a subgroup of S.
- 
(b) The conjugation map  $c_g:S_g\to (S_g)^g$
 is an isomorphism of groups, and $c_g:S_g\to (S_g)^g$
 is an isomorphism of groups, and $S_{g^{-1}}=(S_g)^g$
. $S_{g^{-1}}=(S_g)^g$
.
- 
(c)  $P^g$
 is defined and is a subgroup of S for every subgroup P of $P^g$
 is defined and is a subgroup of S for every subgroup P of $S_g$
. In particular, $S_g$
. In particular, $P^g\in \Delta $
 for any $P^g\in \Delta $
 for any $P\in \Delta $
 with $P\in \Delta $
 with $P\leq S_g$
. $P\leq S_g$
.
Proof. Fix 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
. Then the word
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
. Then the word 
 $(g)$
 of length 1 is in
$(g)$
 of length 1 is in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(2), and since
$\mathbf {D}$
 by Definition 1.1(2), and since 
 $\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
 by (O1), there exists
$\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
 by (O1), there exists 
 $X\in \Delta $
 such that
$X\in \Delta $
 such that 
 $Y:=X^g\in \Delta $
. Let
$Y:=X^g\in \Delta $
. Let 
 $a\in S_g$
, and set
$a\in S_g$
, and set 
 $b=a^g$
. Then
$b=a^g$
. Then 
 $X^a$
 and
$X^a$
 and 
 $Y^b$
 are subgroups of S (as
$Y^b$
 are subgroups of S (as 
 $a,b\in S$
), so
$a,b\in S$
), so 
 $X^a$
 and
$X^a$
 and 
 $Y^b$
 are in
$Y^b$
 are in 
 $\Delta $
 by (O2). Then
$\Delta $
 by (O2). Then 
 $(a^{-1},g,b)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$(a^{-1},g,b)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $X^a$
, so also
$X^a$
, so also 
 $(g,b)\in \mathbf {D}$
. Also
$(g,b)\in \mathbf {D}$
. Also 
 $(a,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$(a,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $X^{a^{-1}}$
. Since
$X^{a^{-1}}$
. Since 
 $g^{-1} ag=b$
, we get
$g^{-1} ag=b$
, we get 
 $ag=gb$
 by Lemma 2.4(a), and hence
$ag=gb$
 by Lemma 2.4(a), and hence 
 $$ \begin{align*}a^{-1} gb=a^{-1}(gb)=a^{-1}(ag)=(a^{-1} a)g=g \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}a^{-1} gb=a^{-1}(gb)=a^{-1}(ag)=(a^{-1} a)g=g \end{align*} $$
by 
 $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. Since
$\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. Since 
 $a^{-1} gb$
 conjugates
$a^{-1} gb$
 conjugates 
 $X^a$
 to
$X^a$
 to 
 $Y^b$
 by Lemma 2.3(c), we draw the following conclusion.
$Y^b$
 by Lemma 2.3(c), we draw the following conclusion. 
- 
(1)  $X^a\leq S_g$
 and $X^a\leq S_g$
 and $(X^a)^g\in \Delta $
 for all $(X^a)^g\in \Delta $
 for all $a\in S_g$
. $a\in S_g$
.
Now let 
 $c,d\in S_g$
. Then (1) shows that both
$c,d\in S_g$
. Then (1) shows that both 
 $X^c$
 and
$X^c$
 and 
 are members of
 are members of 
 $\Delta $
 that are conjugated to members of
$\Delta $
 that are conjugated to members of 
 $\Delta $
 by g. Setting
$\Delta $
 by g. Setting 
 $w=(g^{-1},c,g,g^{-1},d,g)$
, we conclude (by following
$w=(g^{-1},c,g,g^{-1},d,g)$
, we conclude (by following 
 $X^g$
 along the chain of conjugations given by w) that
$X^g$
 along the chain of conjugations given by w) that 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $X^g$
. Then
$X^g$
. Then 
 $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity yields
$\mathbf {D}$
-associativity yields 
 $$ \begin{align} \Pi(w)=(cd)^g=c^g d^g.  \end{align} $$
$$ \begin{align} \Pi(w)=(cd)^g=c^g d^g.  \end{align} $$
Since 
 $c^g$
 and
$c^g$
 and 
 $d^g$
 are in S, we conclude that
$d^g$
 are in S, we conclude that 
 $cd\in S_g$
. Since
$cd\in S_g$
. Since 
 $S_g$
 is closed under inversion by Lemma 1.6(b),
$S_g$
 is closed under inversion by Lemma 1.6(b), 
 $S_g$
 is a subgroup of S. As
$S_g$
 is a subgroup of S. As 
 $X\leq S_g\leq S$
, where X and S are in
$X\leq S_g\leq S$
, where X and S are in 
 $\Delta $
, (O2) now yields
$\Delta $
, (O2) now yields 
 $S_g\in \Delta $
. Thus (a) holds.
$S_g\in \Delta $
. Thus (a) holds.
 Since 
 $c_{g^{-1}}=(c_g)^{-1}$
 by Lemma 1.6(c), it follows that
$c_{g^{-1}}=(c_g)^{-1}$
 by Lemma 1.6(c), it follows that 
 $S_{g^{-1}}=(S_g)^g$
. Points (b) and (c) are then immediate from (a) and Lemma 2.3(b).
$S_{g^{-1}}=(S_g)^g$
. Points (b) and (c) are then immediate from (a) and Lemma 2.3(b).
Corollary 2.6. Assume the hypothesis of Proposition 2.5, let 
 $w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
, and define
$w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
, and define 
 $S_w$
 to be the set of all
$S_w$
 to be the set of all 
 $x\in S$
 such that, for all k with
$x\in S$
 such that, for all k with 
 $1\leq k\leq n$
, the composition
$1\leq k\leq n$
, the composition 
 $c_{g_1}\circ \cdots \circ c_{g_k}$
 is defined on x and maps x into S. Then
$c_{g_1}\circ \cdots \circ c_{g_k}$
 is defined on x and maps x into S. Then 
 $S_w$
 is a subgroup of S, and
$S_w$
 is a subgroup of S, and 
 $S_w\in \Delta $
 if and only if
$S_w\in \Delta $
 if and only if 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
.
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
.
Proof. Let 
 $x_0,y_0\in S_w$
, and let
$x_0,y_0\in S_w$
, and let 
 $\sigma =(x_0,\cdots ,x_n)$
 and
$\sigma =(x_0,\cdots ,x_n)$
 and 
 $\tau =(y_0,\cdots ,y_n)$
 be the corresponding sequences of elements of S, obtained from
$\tau =(y_0,\cdots ,y_n)$
 be the corresponding sequences of elements of S, obtained from 
 $x_0$
 and
$x_0$
 and 
 $y_0$
 via the sequence of maps
$y_0$
 via the sequence of maps 
 $c_{g_1}\circ \cdots \circ c_{g_k}$
. Set
$c_{g_1}\circ \cdots \circ c_{g_k}$
. Set 
 $S_j=S_{g_j} (1\leq j\leq n)$
. Then
$S_j=S_{g_j} (1\leq j\leq n)$
. Then 
 $x_{i-1}$
 and
$x_{i-1}$
 and 
 $y_{i-1}$
 are elements of
$y_{i-1}$
 are elements of 
 $S_{i-1}$
, so
$S_{i-1}$
, so 
 $x_{i-1}y_{i-1}\in S_{i-1}$
 by Proposition 2.5(a). As
$x_{i-1}y_{i-1}\in S_{i-1}$
 by Proposition 2.5(a). As 
 $c_{g_i}$
 restricts to a homomorphism on
$c_{g_i}$
 restricts to a homomorphism on 
 $S_{i-1}$
 (see Lemma 2.3(b)), it follows that
$S_{i-1}$
 (see Lemma 2.3(b)), it follows that 
 $x_iy_i\in S_i$
. Thus
$x_iy_i\in S_i$
. Thus 
 $S_w$
 is closed under the binary product in S. That
$S_w$
 is closed under the binary product in S. That 
 $S_w$
 is closed under inversion is given by Lemma 1.6(c), so
$S_w$
 is closed under inversion is given by Lemma 1.6(c), so 
 $S_w$
 is a subgroup of S.
$S_w$
 is a subgroup of S.
 Suppose that 
 $S_w\in \Delta $
, set
$S_w\in \Delta $
, set 
 $P_0=S_w$
, and recursively define
$P_0=S_w$
, and recursively define 
 $P_k$
 for
$P_k$
 for 
 $0\langle k\leq n$
 by
$0\langle k\leq n$
 by 
 $P_k=(P_{k-1})^{g_k}$
. Then
$P_k=(P_{k-1})^{g_k}$
. Then 
 $P_k$
 is a subgroup of S by Proposition 2.5(c) and induction on k. Then (O2) yields
$P_k$
 is a subgroup of S by Proposition 2.5(c) and induction on k. Then (O2) yields 
 $P_k\in \Delta $
, so
$P_k\in \Delta $
, so 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 by (O1). Conversely, if
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 by (O1). Conversely, if 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, then (O1) shows that
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
, then (O1) shows that 
 $P\leq S_w$
 for some
$P\leq S_w$
 for some 
 $P\in \Delta $
, and then
$P\in \Delta $
, and then 
 $S_w\in \Delta $
 by (O2).
$S_w\in \Delta $
 by (O2).
Henceforth our focus will be on finite objective partial groups of a certain kind. Here is the main definition.
Definition 2.7. Let p be a prime, and let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a finite partial group. Then
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a finite partial group. Then 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is a locality if there exists a p-subgroup S of
$\mathcal {L}$
 is a locality if there exists a p-subgroup S of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 and a set
$\mathcal {L}$
 and a set 
 $\Delta $
 of subgroups of S such that
$\Delta $
 of subgroups of S such that 
- 
(L1)  $(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 is objective. $(\mathcal {L},\Delta )$
 is objective.
- 
(L2) S is in  $\Delta $
, and S is maximal in the set (partially ordered by inclusion) of p-subgroups of $\Delta $
, and S is maximal in the set (partially ordered by inclusion) of p-subgroups of $\mathcal {L}$
. $\mathcal {L}$
.
 As with Definition 2.1, we shall tend to over-emphasise the roles of S and of 
 $\Delta $
 by saying that ‘
$\Delta $
 by saying that ‘
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 is a locality’ when, strictly speaking, we mean only that
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 is a locality’ when, strictly speaking, we mean only that 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is a locality and that S and
$\mathcal {L}$
 is a locality and that S and 
 $\Delta $
 fulfil the conditions (L1) and (L2). (The extent to which S and
$\Delta $
 fulfil the conditions (L1) and (L2). (The extent to which S and 
 $\Delta $
 are determined by
$\Delta $
 are determined by 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is explored in Definition 2.15 and Proposition 2.16 below.)
$\mathcal {L}$
 is explored in Definition 2.15 and Proposition 2.16 below.)
 Notice that if 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is a locality, then the hypothesis of Proposition 2.5 and Corollary 2.6 is fulfilled and we may therefore speak of the subgroups
$\mathcal {L}$
 is a locality, then the hypothesis of Proposition 2.5 and Corollary 2.6 is fulfilled and we may therefore speak of the subgroups 
 $S_g$
 and
$S_g$
 and 
 $S_w$
 of S for any
$S_w$
 of S for any 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 and any
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 and any 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
.
$w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
.
Lemma 2.8. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let 
 $w=(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and let
$w=(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and let 
 $(g_0,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(N_{\mathcal {L}}(S))$
. Then
$(g_0,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(N_{\mathcal {L}}(S))$
. Then 
 $$ \begin{align} (g_0,x_1,g_1^{-1},g_1,x_2,\cdots,x_{n-1},g_{n-1}^{-1},g_{n-1},x_n,g_n)\in\mathbf{D}.  \end{align} $$
$$ \begin{align} (g_0,x_1,g_1^{-1},g_1,x_2,\cdots,x_{n-1},g_{n-1}^{-1},g_{n-1},x_n,g_n)\in\mathbf{D}.  \end{align} $$
In particular, conjugation by 
 $g\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
 is an automorphism of the partial group
$g\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
 is an automorphism of the partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
.
Proof. Set 
 $P=(S_w)^{g_0^{-1}}$
. One then observes that the word displayed in (*) is in
$P=(S_w)^{g_0^{-1}}$
. One then observes that the word displayed in (*) is in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 via P. Now fix
$\mathbf {D}$
 via P. Now fix 
 $g\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
. Applying (*) with
$g\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
. Applying (*) with 
 $\ell (w)=1$
 and with
$\ell (w)=1$
 and with 
 $g_0=g^{-1}$
 and
$g_0=g^{-1}$
 and 
 $g=g_1$
, we conclude that there is a well-defined mapping
$g=g_1$
, we conclude that there is a well-defined mapping 
 $\alpha :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}$
 given by conjugation by g. To show that
$\alpha :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}$
 given by conjugation by g. To show that 
 $\alpha $
 is a homomorphism, we need to check that the induced map
$\alpha $
 is a homomorphism, we need to check that the induced map 
 $\alpha _*:\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})\to \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 sends
$\alpha _*:\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})\to \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 sends 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 into
$\mathbf {D}$
 into 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 and that
$\mathbf {D}$
 and that 
 $$ \begin{align} \Pi(w\alpha^*)=\Pi(w)\alpha.  \end{align} $$
$$ \begin{align} \Pi(w\alpha^*)=\Pi(w)\alpha.  \end{align} $$
Set
 $$ \begin{align*}u=(g^{-1},x_1,g,g^{-1},x_2,\cdots,x_{n-1},g,g^{-1},x_n,g). \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}u=(g^{-1},x_1,g,g^{-1},x_2,\cdots,x_{n-1},g,g^{-1},x_n,g). \end{align*} $$
Applying (*) with 
 $g^{-1}$
 in the role of
$g^{-1}$
 in the role of 
 $g_i$
 for all i then yields
$g_i$
 for all i then yields 
 $u\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$u\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $P^g$
. Now set
$P^g$
. Now set 
 $v=((x_1)^g,\cdots ,(x_n)^g)$
. Then
$v=((x_1)^g,\cdots ,(x_n)^g)$
. Then 
 $\Pi (v)=\Pi (u)=\Pi (w)^g$
 by
$\Pi (v)=\Pi (u)=\Pi (w)^g$
 by 
 $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity, and this yields (**). Replacing g with
$\mathbf {D}$
-associativity, and this yields (**). Replacing g with 
 $g^{-1}$
 yields the homomorphism
$g^{-1}$
 yields the homomorphism 
 $\alpha ^{-1}$
 by Lemma 1.6(c), and thus
$\alpha ^{-1}$
 by Lemma 1.6(c), and thus 
 $\alpha $
 is an automorphism of
$\alpha $
 is an automorphism of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
.
Lemma 2.9. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let 
 $P\in \Delta $
. Then there exists
$P\in \Delta $
. Then there exists 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that 
 $N_S(P)\leq S_g$
 and such that
$N_S(P)\leq S_g$
 and such that 
 $N_S(P^g)$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of
$N_S(P^g)$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P^g)$
.
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(P^g)$
.
Proof. Observe first of all that by (L2), the lemma holds for 
 $P=S$
 and
$P=S$
 and 
 $g=\mathbf {1}$
. Among all P for which the lemma fails to hold, choose P so that first
$g=\mathbf {1}$
. Among all P for which the lemma fails to hold, choose P so that first 
 $|P|$
 and then
$|P|$
 and then 
 $|N_S(P)|$
 is as large as possible. Set
$|N_S(P)|$
 is as large as possible. Set 
 $R=N_S(P)$
, and let
$R=N_S(P)$
, and let 
 $R^*$
 be a Sylow p-subgroup of
$R^*$
 be a Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
 containing R. Then
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
 containing R. Then 
 $R<R^*$
 (proper subgroup), and then also
$R<R^*$
 (proper subgroup), and then also 
 $R<N_{R^*}(R)$
. We have
$R<N_{R^*}(R)$
. We have 
 $P\neq R$
 as
$P\neq R$
 as 
 $P\neq S$
, and then the maximality of
$P\neq S$
, and then the maximality of 
 $|P|$
 yields the existence of an element
$|P|$
 yields the existence of an element 
 $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(R,S)$
 with
$f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(R,S)$
 with 
 $N_S(R^f)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {L}}(R^f))$
.
$N_S(R^f)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {L}}(R^f))$
.
By Lemma 2.3(b), f-conjugation induces an isomorphism
 $$ \begin{align*}N_{\mathcal{L}}(R)\xrightarrow{c_f} N_{\mathcal{L}}(R^f). \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}N_{\mathcal{L}}(R)\xrightarrow{c_f} N_{\mathcal{L}}(R^f). \end{align*} $$
By Sylow’s theorem, there exists 
 $x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(R^f)$
 such that
$x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(R^f)$
 such that 
 $(N_{R^*}(R)^f)^x\leq N_S(R^f)$
. Here
$(N_{R^*}(R)^f)^x\leq N_S(R^f)$
. Here 
 $(f,x)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via R, so Lemma 2.3(c) yields
$(f,x)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via R, so Lemma 2.3(c) yields 
 $(N_{R^*}(R)^f)^x=N_{R^*}(R)^{fx}$
. Thus, by replacing f with
$(N_{R^*}(R)^f)^x=N_{R^*}(R)^{fx}$
. Thus, by replacing f with 
 $fx$
, we may assume that f was chosen to begin with so that
$fx$
, we may assume that f was chosen to begin with so that 
 $N_{R^*}(R)^f\leq N_S(R^f)$
. Since
$N_{R^*}(R)^f\leq N_S(R^f)$
. Since 
 $R^*$
 normalises P and
$R^*$
 normalises P and 
 $c_f$
 is an isomorphism, it follows that
$c_f$
 is an isomorphism, it follows that 
 $N_{R^*}(R)^f$
 normalises
$N_{R^*}(R)^f$
 normalises 
 $P^f$
, and thus
$P^f$
, and thus 
 $|N_S(P^f)|>|N_S(P)|$
. The maximality of
$|N_S(P^f)|>|N_S(P)|$
. The maximality of 
 $|N_S(P)|$
 in the choice of P then implies that
$|N_S(P)|$
 in the choice of P then implies that 
 $P^f$
 is not a counterexample to the lemma. Set
$P^f$
 is not a counterexample to the lemma. Set 
 $Q=P^f$
. Thus there exists
$Q=P^f$
. Thus there exists 
 $h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(N_S(Q),S)$
 such that
$h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(N_S(Q),S)$
 such that 
 $N_S(Q^h)$
 is a Sylow subgroup of
$N_S(Q^h)$
 is a Sylow subgroup of 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q^h)$
. Here
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q^h)$
. Here 
 $(f,h)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via R, so
$(f,h)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via R, so 
 $Q^h=P^g$
, where
$Q^h=P^g$
, where 
 $g=fh$
, so P is not a counterexample to the lemma, and therefore no counterexample exists.
$g=fh$
, so P is not a counterexample to the lemma, and therefore no counterexample exists.
Proposition 2.10. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let H be a subgroup of
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let H be a subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
. 
- 
(a) There exists an object  $P\in \Delta $
 such that $P\in \Delta $
 such that $H\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
. Indeed, there exists a unique largest such P. $H\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
. Indeed, there exists a unique largest such P. $($
 All subgroups are ‘local subgroups’. $($
 All subgroups are ‘local subgroups’. $)$ $)$
- 
(b) Let P be the largest  $P\in \Delta $
 as in (a). Then there exists $P\in \Delta $
 as in (a). Then there exists $w\in \mathbf {W}(H)$
 such that $w\in \mathbf {W}(H)$
 such that $P=S_w$
. $P=S_w$
.
- 
(c) If H is a p-subgroup of  $\mathcal {L}$
, then there exists $\mathcal {L}$
, then there exists $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that $H^g\leq S$
. $H^g\leq S$
.
Proof. For any 
 $w=(h_1,\cdots ,h_n)\in \mathbf {W}(H)$
, let
$w=(h_1,\cdots ,h_n)\in \mathbf {W}(H)$
, let 
 $w'$
 be the word
$w'$
 be the word 
 $(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)$
 defined by
$(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)$
 defined by 
 $g_i=h_1\cdots h_i$
. As H is finite, we may choose w so as to maximise the cardinality of the set
$g_i=h_1\cdots h_i$
. As H is finite, we may choose w so as to maximise the cardinality of the set 
 $X=\{g_1,\cdots ,g_n\}$
. Suppose that
$X=\{g_1,\cdots ,g_n\}$
. Suppose that 
 $X\neq H$
, let
$X\neq H$
, let 
 $g\in H-X$
, and set
$g\in H-X$
, and set 
 $h=\Pi (w)^{-1} g$
. Then the set of entries of
$h=\Pi (w)^{-1} g$
. Then the set of entries of 
 $(w\circ (h))'$
 is
$(w\circ (h))'$
 is 
 $X\cup \{g\}$
, contrary to the maximality of X. Thus
$X\cup \{g\}$
, contrary to the maximality of X. Thus 
 $X=H$
.
$X=H$
.
 We have 
 $\mathbf {W}(H)\subseteq \mathbf {D}$
 as H is a subgroup of
$\mathbf {W}(H)\subseteq \mathbf {D}$
 as H is a subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, and thus
$\mathcal {L}$
, and thus 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via some
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via some 
 $P\in \Delta $
. Then
$P\in \Delta $
. Then 
 $P^{g_i}=P^{h_1\cdots h_i}\leq S$
 for all i, so
$P^{g_i}=P^{h_1\cdots h_i}\leq S$
 for all i, so 
 $P^h\leq S$
 for all
$P^h\leq S$
 for all 
 $h\in H$
. Set
$h\in H$
. Set 
 $U=\langle P^h\mid h\in H\rangle $
 (the subgroup of S generated by the union of all
$U=\langle P^h\mid h\in H\rangle $
 (the subgroup of S generated by the union of all 
 $P^h$
 for
$P^h$
 for 
 $h\in H$
). Then
$h\in H$
). Then 
 $U\in \Delta $
 by (O2). To complete the proof of (a) and (b) it now suffices to show that
$U\in \Delta $
 by (O2). To complete the proof of (a) and (b) it now suffices to show that 
 $H\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
, and for this it is enough to observe that, by Lemma 2.4(b),
$H\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
, and for this it is enough to observe that, by Lemma 2.4(b), 
 $(P^f)^g$
 is defined and is equal to
$(P^f)^g$
 is defined and is equal to 
 $P^{fg}$
 for all
$P^{fg}$
 for all 
 $f,g\in H$
.
$f,g\in H$
.
 Assume now that H is a p-group. By Lemma 2.9, there exist 
 $V\in \Delta $
 and
$V\in \Delta $
 and 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that 
 $V=U^g$
 and
$V=U^g$
 and 
 $N_S(V)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {L}}(V))$
. Let
$N_S(V)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {L}}(V))$
. Let 
 $c_g:N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)\to N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
 be the isomorphism given by Lemma 2.3(b). Thus
$c_g:N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)\to N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
 be the isomorphism given by Lemma 2.3(b). Thus 
 $H^g$
 is a p-subgroup of
$H^g$
 is a p-subgroup of 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
, so there exists
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
, so there exists 
 $x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
 with
$x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
 with 
 $(H^g)^x\leq N_S(V)$
. Since
$(H^g)^x\leq N_S(V)$
. Since 
 $(g,x)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via U, we may apply Lemma 2.3(c), obtaining
$(g,x)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via U, we may apply Lemma 2.3(c), obtaining 
 $(H^g)^x=H^{gx}$
. Thus (c) holds with
$(H^g)^x=H^{gx}$
. Thus (c) holds with 
 $gx$
 in the role of g.
$gx$
 in the role of g.
 The theory being developed here purports to be ‘p-local’, so it is important to be able to analyse the structure of 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
 for U an arbitrary subgroup of S (not necessarily in
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
 for U an arbitrary subgroup of S (not necessarily in 
 $\Delta $
). Since our policy in this Part I is to avoid bringing in the language of fusion systems, we shall obtain for now only the following very limited result concerning such normalisers.
$\Delta $
). Since our policy in this Part I is to avoid bringing in the language of fusion systems, we shall obtain for now only the following very limited result concerning such normalisers.
Lemma 2.12. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let 
 $R\leq S$
 be a subgroup of S, and set
$R\leq S$
 be a subgroup of S, and set 
 $\Gamma =\{N_P(R)\mid P\in \Delta \}$
. Then
$\Gamma =\{N_P(R)\mid P\in \Delta \}$
. Then 
- 
(a)  $N_{\mathcal {L}}(R)$
 is a partial subgroup of $N_{\mathcal {L}}(R)$
 is a partial subgroup of $\mathcal {L}$
. $\mathcal {L}$
.
- 
(b) If  $\Gamma \subseteq \Delta $
, then $\Gamma \subseteq \Delta $
, then $(N_{\mathcal {L}}(R),\Gamma )$
 is an objective partial group. $(N_{\mathcal {L}}(R),\Gamma )$
 is an objective partial group.
- 
(c) If  $\Gamma \subseteq \Delta $
 and $\Gamma \subseteq \Delta $
 and $N_S(R)$
 is a maximal p-subgroup of $N_S(R)$
 is a maximal p-subgroup of $N_{\mathcal {L}}(R)$
, then $N_{\mathcal {L}}(R)$
, then $(N_{\mathcal {L}}(R),\Gamma ,S)$
 is a locality. $(N_{\mathcal {L}}(R),\Gamma ,S)$
 is a locality.
In particular, if 
 $R\trianglelefteq S$
, then
$R\trianglelefteq S$
, then 
 $(N_{\mathcal {L}}(R),\Delta ,S)$
 is a locality.
$(N_{\mathcal {L}}(R),\Delta ,S)$
 is a locality.
Proof. Set 
 $\mathcal {L}_R=N_{\mathcal {L}}(R)$
. Then Lemma 2.3(c) shows that
$\mathcal {L}_R=N_{\mathcal {L}}(R)$
. Then Lemma 2.3(c) shows that 
 $\Pi $
 maps
$\Pi $
 maps 
 $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L}_R)\cap \mathbf {D}$
 into
$\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L}_R)\cap \mathbf {D}$
 into 
 $\mathcal {L}_R$
, while Lemma 1.6(c) shows that
$\mathcal {L}_R$
, while Lemma 1.6(c) shows that 
 $\mathcal {L}_R$
 is closed under the inversion in
$\mathcal {L}_R$
 is closed under the inversion in 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Thus
$\mathcal {L}$
. Thus 
 $\mathcal {L}_R$
 is a partial subgroup of
$\mathcal {L}_R$
 is a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
.
 Let 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_R)$
 be the domain of the product in the partial group
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_R)$
 be the domain of the product in the partial group 
 $\mathcal {L}_R$
. Then
$\mathcal {L}_R$
. Then 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_R)=\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L}_R)\cap \mathbf {D}$
, by definition. Assume now that
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_R)=\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L}_R)\cap \mathbf {D}$
, by definition. Assume now that 
 $\Gamma \subseteq \Delta $
, and let
$\Gamma \subseteq \Delta $
, and let 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_R)$
 via some
$w\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_R)$
 via some 
 $P\in \Delta $
. Then
$P\in \Delta $
. Then 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_R)$
 via
$w\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_R)$
 via 
 $N_P(R)$
, and thus
$N_P(R)$
, and thus 
 $\mathcal {L}_R$
 satisfies the condition (O1) for objectivity in Definition 2.1. Also, as
$\mathcal {L}_R$
 satisfies the condition (O1) for objectivity in Definition 2.1. Also, as 
 $\Gamma \subseteq \Delta $
, we have
$\Gamma \subseteq \Delta $
, we have 
 $\Gamma =\{P\in \Delta \mid P\leq N_S(R)\}$
, so
$\Gamma =\{P\in \Delta \mid P\leq N_S(R)\}$
, so 
 $\Gamma $
 is closed in the sense of condition (O2) in Definition 2.1. This yields (b). Point (c) is then immediate from Definition 2.7.
$\Gamma $
 is closed in the sense of condition (O2) in Definition 2.1. This yields (b). Point (c) is then immediate from Definition 2.7.
Lemma 2.13. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and set
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and set 
 $$ \begin{align*}O_p(\mathcal{L})=\bigcap\{S_w\mid w\in\mathbf{W}(\mathcal{L})\}. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}O_p(\mathcal{L})=\bigcap\{S_w\mid w\in\mathbf{W}(\mathcal{L})\}. \end{align*} $$
Then 
 $O_p(\mathcal {L})$
 is the unique largest subgroup of S that is a partial normal subgroup of
$O_p(\mathcal {L})$
 is the unique largest subgroup of S that is a partial normal subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
.
Proof. Set 
 $Y=O_p(\mathcal {L})$
, let
$Y=O_p(\mathcal {L})$
, let 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
. Then
$w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
. Then 
 $Y\leq S_g$
 and
$Y\leq S_g$
 and 
 $Y\leq S_{(g)\circ w}$
, so
$Y\leq S_{(g)\circ w}$
, so 
 $Y^g\leq S_w$
. Thus
$Y^g\leq S_w$
. Thus 
 $Y^g\leq Y$
, so
$Y^g\leq Y$
, so 
 $Y\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
$Y\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
 Now let 
 $X\leq S$
 with
$X\leq S$
 with 
 $X\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Then
$X\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Then 
 $X\trianglelefteq S$
. Let
$X\trianglelefteq S$
. Let 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and set
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and set 
 $P=S_g$
. Then conjugation by g is defined on
$P=S_g$
. Then conjugation by g is defined on 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
 by Lemma 2.3(b), so
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
 by Lemma 2.3(b), so 
 $N_X(P)^g$
 is defined, and then
$N_X(P)^g$
 is defined, and then 
 $N_X(P)^g\leq X$
 as
$N_X(P)^g\leq X$
 as 
 $X\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Thus
$X\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Thus 
 $N_X(P)^g\leq S$
, so
$N_X(P)^g\leq S$
, so 
 $N_X(P)\leq S_g$
. As
$N_X(P)\leq S_g$
. As 
 $S_gX=PX$
 is a subgroup of S, it follows that
$S_gX=PX$
 is a subgroup of S, it follows that 
 $X\leq P$
, so
$X\leq P$
, so 
 $X^g=X$
, and
$X^g=X$
, and 
 $X\leq O_p(\mathcal {L})$
.
$X\leq O_p(\mathcal {L})$
.
 Given a locality 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, there can be more than one choice for S and, after that, more than one choice for
$\mathcal {L}$
, there can be more than one choice for S and, after that, more than one choice for 
 $\Delta $
, such that
$\Delta $
, such that 
 $\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
.
$\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
.
Definition 2.14. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group. An automorphism
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a partial group. An automorphism 
 $\alpha $
 of
$\alpha $
 of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is inner if there exists
$\mathcal {L}$
 is inner if there exists 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that 
 $\alpha $
 is given by conjugation by g. That is,
$\alpha $
 is given by conjugation by g. That is, 
- 
(1)  $x\in \mathcal {L} \implies x^g$
 is defined and is equal to $x\in \mathcal {L} \implies x^g$
 is defined and is equal to $x\alpha $
, and $x\alpha $
, and
- 
(2)  $(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)\in \mathbf {D} \implies (x_1^g,\cdots ,x_n^g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 and $(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)\in \mathbf {D} \implies (x_1^g,\cdots ,x_n^g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 and $x_1^g\cdots x_n^g=(x_1\cdots x_n)^g$
. $x_1^g\cdots x_n^g=(x_1\cdots x_n)^g$
.
Write 
 $Inn(\mathcal {L})$
 for the set of all inner automorphisms of
$Inn(\mathcal {L})$
 for the set of all inner automorphisms of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
.
Definition 2.15. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a locality, and let S be a p-subgroup of
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a locality, and let S be a p-subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Then S is a Sylow p-subgroup of
$\mathcal {L}$
. Then S is a Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 if there exists a set
$\mathcal {L}$
 if there exists a set 
 $\Delta $
 of subgroups of S such that
$\Delta $
 of subgroups of S such that 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 satisfies the conditions (L1) and (L2) of Definition 2.7. Write
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 satisfies the conditions (L1) and (L2) of Definition 2.7. Write 
 $Syl_p(\mathcal {L})$
 for the set of Sylow p-subgroups of
$Syl_p(\mathcal {L})$
 for the set of Sylow p-subgroups of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
.
 It will be convenient to introduce some notation regarding ‘conjugation’ by words 
 $w\in (\mathcal {L})$
 in the case of a locality
$w\in (\mathcal {L})$
 in the case of a locality 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
. Thus, let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
. Thus, let 
 $w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
, and let X be a subgroup of
$w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
, and let X be a subgroup of 
 $S_w$
. For each
$S_w$
. For each 
 $x=x_0\in X$
 and each index i from
$x=x_0\in X$
 and each index i from 
 $1$
 to n, there is then an element
$1$
 to n, there is then an element 
 $x_i\in S$
 defined by
$x_i\in S$
 defined by 
 $x_i=(x_{i-1})^{g_i}$
, and we may write
$x_i=(x_{i-1})^{g_i}$
, and we may write 
 $x^w$
 for
$x^w$
 for 
 $x_n$
. The mapping
$x_n$
. The mapping 
 $x\mapsto x^w$
 may be written as
$x\mapsto x^w$
 may be written as 
 $$ \begin{align*}c_w: X\to X^w. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}c_w: X\to X^w. \end{align*} $$
Proposition 2.16. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let K be the set of all
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let K be the set of all 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that conjugation by g is an inner automorphism of
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that conjugation by g is an inner automorphism of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {L}$
. 
- 
(a) K is a subgroup of  $\mathcal {L}$
. $\mathcal {L}$
.
- 
(b) For each  $w=(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
 and each $w=(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
 and each $(g_0,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(K)$
, we have (*) $(g_0,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(K)$
, we have (*) $$ \begin{align} (g_0,x_1,g_1^{-1},g_1,x_2,\cdots,g_{n-1}^{-1},g_{n-1},x_n,g_n)\in\mathbf{D}.  \end{align} $$ $$ \begin{align} (g_0,x_1,g_1^{-1},g_1,x_2,\cdots,g_{n-1}^{-1},g_{n-1},x_n,g_n)\in\mathbf{D}.  \end{align} $$
- 
(c) Set  $Q=O_p(K)$
. Then $Q=O_p(K)$
. Then $Q\in \Delta $
 and $Q\in \Delta $
 and $K=N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
. Moreover, for each $K=N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
. Moreover, for each $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, there exists $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, there exists $P\leq Q\cap S_w$
 such that $P\leq Q\cap S_w$
 such that $P\in \Delta $
 and $P\in \Delta $
 and $P^w\leq Q$
. $P^w\leq Q$
.
- 
(d)  $Syl_p(\mathcal {L})=Syl_p(K)$
. $Syl_p(\mathcal {L})=Syl_p(K)$
.
- 
(e)  $Inn(\mathcal {L})\trianglelefteq Aut(\mathcal {L})$
, and every automorphism of $Inn(\mathcal {L})\trianglelefteq Aut(\mathcal {L})$
, and every automorphism of $\mathcal {L}$
 can be factored as an inner automorphism followed by an automorphism that leaves S invariant. $\mathcal {L}$
 can be factored as an inner automorphism followed by an automorphism that leaves S invariant.
Proof. Write 
 $\mathcal {S}$
 for
$\mathcal {S}$
 for 
 $Syl_p(\mathcal {L})$
. For
$Syl_p(\mathcal {L})$
. For 
 $S'\in \mathcal {S}$
, note that
$S'\in \mathcal {S}$
, note that 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(S')$
 is a subgroup of
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(S')$
 is a subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. By Lemma 2.8, the condition (*) holds with
$\mathcal {L}$
. By Lemma 2.8, the condition (*) holds with 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(S')$
 in the role of K. Let
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(S')$
 in the role of K. Let 
 $\mathcal {U}$
 be the union (taken over all
$\mathcal {U}$
 be the union (taken over all 
 $S'\in \mathcal {S}$
) of the groups
$S'\in \mathcal {S}$
) of the groups 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(S')$
, and let H be the partial subgroup of
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(S')$
, and let H be the partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 generated by
$\mathcal {L}$
 generated by 
 $\mathcal {U}$
. The above observation concerning Lemma 2.8 together with a straightforward argument by induction on word length then yields
$\mathcal {U}$
. The above observation concerning Lemma 2.8 together with a straightforward argument by induction on word length then yields 
 $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {U})\subseteq \mathbf {D}$
, and thus H is a subgroup of
$\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {U})\subseteq \mathbf {D}$
, and thus H is a subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Moreover,
$\mathcal {L}$
. Moreover, 
 $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {U})$
 has the following property: For any
$\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {U})$
 has the following property: For any 
 $(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
 and any
$(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
 and any 
 $(u_0,\cdots ,u_n)$
 with each
$(u_0,\cdots ,u_n)$
 with each 
 $u_i\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {U})$
, the word
$u_i\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {U})$
, the word 
 $$ \begin{align*}u_0\circ g_1\circ u_1^{-1}\circ u_1\circ g_2\circ\cdots\circ u_{n-1}^{-1}\circ u_{n-1}\circ g_n\circ u_n \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}u_0\circ g_1\circ u_1^{-1}\circ u_1\circ g_2\circ\cdots\circ u_{n-1}^{-1}\circ u_{n-1}\circ g_n\circ u_n \end{align*} $$
is in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 by induction on the sum of the lengths of the words
$\mathbf {D}$
 by induction on the sum of the lengths of the words 
 $u_i$
. The condition (*) then holds with H in the role of K, by
$u_i$
. The condition (*) then holds with H in the role of K, by 
 $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. In particular, conjugation by
$\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. In particular, conjugation by 
 $g\in H$
 is an automorphism of
$g\in H$
 is an automorphism of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, and thus H is a subset of K.
$\mathcal {L}$
, and thus H is a subset of K.
 Now let 
 $g\in K$
. Then
$g\in K$
. Then 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ^g,S^g)$
 is a locality, so
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ^g,S^g)$
 is a locality, so 
 $S^g\in \mathcal {S}$
. Then
$S^g\in \mathcal {S}$
. Then 
 $S^g\in Syl_p(H)$
, and there exists
$S^g\in Syl_p(H)$
, and there exists 
 $h\in H$
 with
$h\in H$
 with 
 $S^g=S^h$
. The product
$S^g=S^h$
. The product 
 $gh^{-1}$
 is defined, and then
$gh^{-1}$
 is defined, and then 
 $gh^{-1}\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
. Thus
$gh^{-1}\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
. Thus 
 $gh^{-1}\in H$
, so
$gh^{-1}\in H$
, so 
 $g\in H$
, and we conclude that
$g\in H$
, and we conclude that 
 $H=K$
. This completes the proof of (a), (b) and (d). Point (e) is immediate from (d), so it remains only to prove (c).
$H=K$
. This completes the proof of (a), (b) and (d). Point (e) is immediate from (d), so it remains only to prove (c).
 By Proposition 2.10(a), K normalises a member of 
 $\Delta $
. Then, since
$\Delta $
. Then, since 
 $S\in Syl_p(K)$
, we obtain
$S\in Syl_p(K)$
, we obtain 
 $Q:=O_p(K)\in \Delta $
. By Proposition 2.10(b), there exists a word
$Q:=O_p(K)\in \Delta $
. By Proposition 2.10(b), there exists a word 
 $u\in \mathbf {W}(K)$
 such that
$u\in \mathbf {W}(K)$
 such that 
 $Q=S_u$
. Then also
$Q=S_u$
. Then also 
 $Q=S_{u^{-1}}$
. Let
$Q=S_{u^{-1}}$
. Let 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and let
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and let 
 $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
. The word
$f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
. The word 
 $v:=u\circ w\circ u$
 is in
$v:=u\circ w\circ u$
 is in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 by (*), and clearly
$\mathbf {D}$
 by (*), and clearly 
 $S_v\leq Q$
 and
$S_v\leq Q$
 and 
 $S_{v^{-1}}\leq Q$
. Set
$S_{v^{-1}}\leq Q$
. Set 
 $P=(S_v)^{\Pi (u)}$
. Then
$P=(S_v)^{\Pi (u)}$
. Then 
 $P\leq S_w\cap Q$
 and
$P\leq S_w\cap Q$
 and 
 $P^{\Pi (w)}\leq Q$
. As
$P^{\Pi (w)}\leq Q$
. As 
 $S_v\in \Delta $
, we have
$S_v\in \Delta $
, we have 
 $P\in \Delta $
. Write
$P\in \Delta $
. Write 
 $w=(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)$
. Then
$w=(x_1,\cdots ,x_n)$
. Then 
 $$ \begin{align*} (f^{-1},x_1,f,f^{-1},\cdots,f,f^{-1},x_n,f)\in\mathbf{D}\ \ \text{via } P^f, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} (f^{-1},x_1,f,f^{-1},\cdots,f,f^{-1},x_n,f)\in\mathbf{D}\ \ \text{via } P^f, \end{align*} $$
and this shows that conjugation by f is an inner automorphism of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Thus
$\mathcal {L}$
. Thus 
 $K=N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
, and the proof is complete.
$K=N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
, and the proof is complete.
Lemma 2.17. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a locality, and let S be a Sylow p-subgroup of
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a locality, and let S be a Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Then there is a unique smallest set
$\mathcal {L}$
. Then there is a unique smallest set 
 $\Delta =\Delta _0$
 and a unique largest set
$\Delta =\Delta _0$
 and a unique largest set 
 $\Delta =\Delta _1$
 of subgroups of S such that the conditions (L1) and (L2) of Definition 2.7 are satisfied by
$\Delta =\Delta _1$
 of subgroups of S such that the conditions (L1) and (L2) of Definition 2.7 are satisfied by 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
.
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
.
Proof. Take 
 $\Delta _0$
 to be the overgroup-closure in S of the set of all
$\Delta _0$
 to be the overgroup-closure in S of the set of all 
 $S_w$
 for
$S_w$
 for 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
. Take
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
. Take 
 $\Delta _1$
 to be the union of all the sets
$\Delta _1$
 to be the union of all the sets 
 $\Gamma $
 of subgroups of S that fulfil (L1) and (L2).
$\Gamma $
 of subgroups of S that fulfil (L1) and (L2).
3 Partial normal subgroups
 Throughout this section, we fix a locality 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 and a partial normal subgroup
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 and a partial normal subgroup 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Recall that this means that
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Recall that this means that 
 $\mathcal {N}\leq \mathcal {L}$
 is a partial subgroup of
$\mathcal {N}\leq \mathcal {L}$
 is a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 and
$\mathcal {L}$
 and 
 $\Pi (g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathcal {N}$
 for all
$\Pi (g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathcal {N}$
 for all 
 $x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and all
$x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and all 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 for which
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 for which 
 $(g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
. Set
$(g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
. Set 
 $T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
.
$T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
.
Lemma 3.1.
- 
(a) Let  $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let $P\leq S_g$
. Then $P\leq S_g$
. Then $(T\cap P)^g=T\cap P^g$
. In particular, we have $(T\cap P)^g=T\cap P^g$
. In particular, we have $(T\cap S_g)^g\leq T$
. $(T\cap S_g)^g\leq T$
.
- 
(b) Let  $x\in \mathcal {N}$
, and let P be a subgroup of $x\in \mathcal {N}$
, and let P be a subgroup of $S_x$
. Then $S_x$
. Then $PT=P^x T$
. $PT=P^x T$
.
- 
(c) T is maximal in the poset of p-subgroups of  $\mathcal {N}$
. $\mathcal {N}$
.
Proof.
- 
(a) Let  $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, let $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, let $P\leq S_g$
, and let $P\leq S_g$
, and let $t\in T\cap P$
. Then $t\in T\cap P$
. Then $t^g\in S$
, and $t^g\in S$
, and $t^g\in \mathcal {N}$
 as $t^g\in \mathcal {N}$
 as $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Thus $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Thus $t^g\in T$
, so (*)Now replace g with $t^g\in T$
, so (*)Now replace g with $$ \begin{align} (T\cap P)^g\leq T\cap P^g.  \end{align} $$ $$ \begin{align} (T\cap P)^g\leq T\cap P^g.  \end{align} $$ $g^{-1}$
 and replace P with the subgroup $g^{-1}$
 and replace P with the subgroup $P^g$
 of $P^g$
 of $S_{g^{-1}}$
. Then (*) becomes the statement (**)Conjugating (**) by g yields $S_{g^{-1}}$
. Then (*) becomes the statement (**)Conjugating (**) by g yields $$ \begin{align} (T\cap P^g)^{g^{-1}}\leq T\cap P.  \end{align} $$ $$ \begin{align} (T\cap P^g)^{g^{-1}}\leq T\cap P.  \end{align} $$ $T\cap P^g\leq (T\cap P)^g$
, and thus (*) is an equality, as required. $T\cap P^g\leq (T\cap P)^g$
, and thus (*) is an equality, as required.
- 
(b) Let  $a\in P$
. Then $a\in P$
. Then $(P^x)^a\leq S$
 and $(P^x)^a\leq S$
 and $P^a=P$
. Setting $P^a=P$
. Setting $w=(a^{-1},x^{-1},a,x)$
, we then have $w=(a^{-1},x^{-1},a,x)$
, we then have $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $P^{xa}$
. Now $P^{xa}$
. Now $\Pi (w)=a^{-1} a^x\in S$
, while also $\Pi (w)=a^{-1} a^x\in S$
, while also $\Pi (w)=(x^{-1})^ax\in \mathcal {N}$
, so $\Pi (w)=(x^{-1})^ax\in \mathcal {N}$
, so $\Pi (w)\in T$
. Then $\Pi (w)\in T$
. Then $a^x\in aT$
, and we have thus shown that $a^x\in aT$
, and we have thus shown that $P^x\leq PT$
. Then $P^x\leq PT$
. Then $P^x T\leq PT$
. The reverse inequality is given (as in the proof of (a)) by replacing x with $P^x T\leq PT$
. The reverse inequality is given (as in the proof of (a)) by replacing x with $x^{-1}$
 and replacing P with $x^{-1}$
 and replacing P with $P^x$
. $P^x$
.
- 
(c) Let R be a p-subgroup of  $\mathcal {N}$
 containing T. By Proposition 2.10(c), there exists $\mathcal {N}$
 containing T. By Proposition 2.10(c), there exists $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 with $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 with $R^g\leq S$
, and then $R^g\leq S$
, and then $R^g\leq S\cap \mathcal {N}=T$
. As $R^g\leq S\cap \mathcal {N}=T$
. As $T^g=T$
 and conjugation by g is injective, we conclude that $T^g=T$
 and conjugation by g is injective, we conclude that $R=T$
. $R=T$
.
Lemma 3.2. Let 
 $x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
, and let
$x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
, and let 
 $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
.
$f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
. 
- 
(a) If  $(x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, then $(x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, then $(f,f^{-1},x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, $(f,f^{-1},x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, $xf=fx^f$
, and $xf=fx^f$
, and $S_{(x,f)}=S_{(f,x^f)}=S_x\cap S_f$
. $S_{(x,f)}=S_{(f,x^f)}=S_x\cap S_f$
.
- 
(b) If  $(f,y)\in \mathbf {D}$
, then $(f,y)\in \mathbf {D}$
, then $(f,y,f^{-1},f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, $(f,y,f^{-1},f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, $fy=y^{f^{-1}}f$
, and $fy=y^{f^{-1}}f$
, and $S_{(f,y)}=S_{(y^{f^{-1}},f)}=S_{y^{f^{-1}}}\cap S_f$
. $S_{(f,y)}=S_{(y^{f^{-1}},f)}=S_{y^{f^{-1}}}\cap S_f$
.
Proof. Set 
 $Q=S_{(x,f)}$
 and
$Q=S_{(x,f)}$
 and 
 $P=S_x\cap S_f$
. As
$P=S_x\cap S_f$
. As 
 $x\in \mathcal {N}$
, we have
$x\in \mathcal {N}$
, we have 
 $Q^xT=QT$
 by Lemma 3.1(b). Then since
$Q^xT=QT$
 by Lemma 3.1(b). Then since 
 $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, we obtain
$f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, we obtain 
 $QT\leq S_f$
. Thus
$QT\leq S_f$
. Thus 
 $Q\leq P$
. But also
$Q\leq P$
. But also 
 $P^xT=PT$
, so
$P^xT=PT$
, so 
 $P=Q$
. Now
$P=Q$
. Now 
 $(f,f^{-1},x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Q, and
$(f,f^{-1},x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Q, and 
 $\Pi (f,f^{-1},x,f)=xf=fx^f$
. We have
$\Pi (f,f^{-1},x,f)=xf=fx^f$
. We have 
 $$ \begin{align*}Q=S_f\cap S_x = S_{(f,f^{-1},x,f)}\leq S_{(f,x^f)}, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}Q=S_f\cap S_x = S_{(f,f^{-1},x,f)}\leq S_{(f,x^f)}, \end{align*} $$
so in order to complete the proof of (a), it remains to show that 
 $S_{(f,x^f)}\leq Q$
.
$S_{(f,x^f)}\leq Q$
.
 On the other hand, in addressing (b), set 
 $R=S_{(f,y)}$
. Then Lemma 3.1(b) yields
$R=S_{(f,y)}$
. Then Lemma 3.1(b) yields 
 $R^{fy}T=R^fT$
, so that
$R^{fy}T=R^fT$
, so that 
 $R^{fy}T\leq \leq S_{f^{-1}}$
. Set
$R^{fy}T\leq \leq S_{f^{-1}}$
. Set 
 $v=(f,y,f^{-1},f)$
. Then
$v=(f,y,f^{-1},f)$
. Then 
 $v\in \mathbf {D}$
 via R, and we have
$v\in \mathbf {D}$
 via R, and we have 
 $R=S_v$
. Now
$R=S_v$
. Now 
 $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity yields
$\mathbf {D}$
-associativity yields 
 $fy=\Pi (v)=y^{f^{-1}}f$
. In the special case that
$fy=\Pi (v)=y^{f^{-1}}f$
. In the special case that 
 $y=x^f$
, we obtain
$y=x^f$
, we obtain 
 $$ \begin{align*}R=S_{(f,x^f)}=S_{(f,x^f,f^{-1},f)}\leq S_{(x,f)}=Q, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}R=S_{(f,x^f)}=S_{(f,x^f,f^{-1},f)}\leq S_{(x,f)}=Q, \end{align*} $$
completing the proof of (a). The remainder of (b) now follows as an application of (a) to 
 $(y^{f^{-1}},f)$
, and the remainder of (b) as an application of (a) to
$(y^{f^{-1}},f)$
, and the remainder of (b) as an application of (a) to 
 $(y^{f^{-1}},f)$
.
$(y^{f^{-1}},f)$
.
Lemma 3.3. Let 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}(N_{\mathcal {L}}(T))\cap \mathbf {D}$
, set
$w\in \mathbf {W}(N_{\mathcal {L}}(T))\cap \mathbf {D}$
, set 
 $g=\Pi (w)$
, and let
$g=\Pi (w)$
, and let 
 $x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
.
$x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
. 
- 
(a) Suppose that  $(x)\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and set $(x)\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and set $P=S_{(x)\circ w}$
. Then $P=S_{(x)\circ w}$
. Then $u:=w\circ w^{-1}\circ (x)\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $u:=w\circ w^{-1}\circ (x)\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $S_u=P^g$
. $S_u=P^g$
.
- 
(b) Suppose that  $w\circ (y)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and set $w\circ (y)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and set $Q=S_{w\circ (y)}$
. Then $Q=S_{w\circ (y)}$
. Then $v:=w\circ (y)\circ w^{-1}\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $v:=w\circ (y)\circ w^{-1}\circ w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $S_v=Q$
. $S_v=Q$
.
Proof. We prove only (a), leaving it to the reader to supply a similar argument for (b). As 
 $P^xT=PT$
 by Lemma 3.1(b), and since both
$P^xT=PT$
 by Lemma 3.1(b), and since both 
 $P^x$
 and T are contained in
$P^x$
 and T are contained in 
 $S_w$
, we have
$S_w$
, we have 
 $P\leq S_w$
. Then
$P\leq S_w$
. Then 
 $P^g\leq S$
 by Lemma 2.3(c), and
$P^g\leq S$
 by Lemma 2.3(c), and 
 $P^g\leq S_u$
. In particular,
$P^g\leq S_u$
. In particular, 
 $u\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$u\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $P^g$
. As
$P^g$
. As 
 $S_u\leq S_{w^{-1}}$
, and
$S_u\leq S_{w^{-1}}$
, and 
 $(S_u)^{g^{-1}}\leq P$
, we obtain
$(S_u)^{g^{-1}}\leq P$
, we obtain 
 $S_u\leq P^g$
. Thus
$S_u\leq P^g$
. Thus 
 $S_u=P^g$
.
$S_u=P^g$
.
Lemma 3.4. Let 
 $w=(f_1,g_1,\cdots ,f_n,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
, with
$w=(f_1,g_1,\cdots ,f_n,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
, with 
 $f_i\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 and with
$f_i\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 and with 
 $g_i\in \mathcal {N}$
 for all i. Set
$g_i\in \mathcal {N}$
 for all i. Set 
 $u=(f_1,\cdots ,f_n)$
. Then there exists
$u=(f_1,\cdots ,f_n)$
. Then there exists 
 $g\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that
$g\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that 
 $$ \begin{align} S_w\leq S_{u\circ(g)}\ \ \text{and}\ \ \Pi(w)=\Pi(u\circ(g)).  \end{align} $$
$$ \begin{align} S_w\leq S_{u\circ(g)}\ \ \text{and}\ \ \Pi(w)=\Pi(u\circ(g)).  \end{align} $$
Similarly, there exists 
 $g'\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that
$g'\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that 
 $$ \begin{align} S_w\leq S_{(g')\circ u}\ \ \text{and}\ \ \Pi(w)=\Pi((g')\circ u).  \end{align} $$
$$ \begin{align} S_w\leq S_{(g')\circ u}\ \ \text{and}\ \ \Pi(w)=\Pi((g')\circ u).  \end{align} $$
Proof. The case 
 $n=1$
 is given by Lemma 3.2. For the general case, write
$n=1$
 is given by Lemma 3.2. For the general case, write 
 $$ \begin{align*}w=(f_1,g_1)\circ w_1, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}w=(f_1,g_1)\circ w_1, \end{align*} $$
and set 
 $u_1=(f_2,\cdots ,f_n)$
. Induction on n implies that there exists
$u_1=(f_2,\cdots ,f_n)$
. Induction on n implies that there exists 
 $x_1\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that
$x_1\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that 
 $S_{w_1}\leq S_{u_1\circ (x_1)}$
 and
$S_{w_1}\leq S_{u_1\circ (x_1)}$
 and 
 $\Pi (w_1)=\Pi (u_1\circ (x_1))$
. Set
$\Pi (w_1)=\Pi (u_1\circ (x_1))$
. Set 
 $$ \begin{align*}w'=(f_1,g_1)\circ u_1\circ(x_1). \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}w'=(f_1,g_1)\circ u_1\circ(x_1). \end{align*} $$
Thus 
 $S_w\leq S_{w'}$
, and we have
$S_w\leq S_{w'}$
, and we have 
 $\Pi (w)=\Pi (w')$
 by
$\Pi (w)=\Pi (w')$
 by 
 $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. Apply Lemma 3.3(a) to the word
$\mathbf {D}$
-associativity. Apply Lemma 3.3(a) to the word 
 $(g_1)\circ u_1$
 to obtain (*). A similar argument in which one begins by writing
$(g_1)\circ u_1$
 to obtain (*). A similar argument in which one begins by writing 
 $w=w_n\circ (f_n,g_n)$
 yields (**).
$w=w_n\circ (f_n,g_n)$
 yields (**).
The following result will be of fundamental importance in Part III.
Lemma 3.5. Suppose that
 $$ \begin{align} C_{N_{\mathcal{L}}(P)}(O_p(N_{\mathcal{L}}(P)))\leq O_p(N_{\mathcal{L}}(P))\quad\text{for all } P\in\Delta \text{ with } T\leq P.  \end{align} $$
$$ \begin{align} C_{N_{\mathcal{L}}(P)}(O_p(N_{\mathcal{L}}(P)))\leq O_p(N_{\mathcal{L}}(P))\quad\text{for all } P\in\Delta \text{ with } T\leq P.  \end{align} $$
Then 
 $N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(C_S(T)T)\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(C_S(T))$
.
$N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(C_S(T)T)\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(C_S(T))$
.
Proof. Let 
 $g\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)$
, and set
$g\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)$
, and set 
 $P=S_g$
. Then
$P=S_g$
. Then 
 $P^g=P$
 by Lemma 3.1(b). Set
$P^g=P$
 by Lemma 3.1(b). Set 
 $M=N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
,
$M=N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
, 
 $K=\mathcal {N}\cap M$
 and
$K=\mathcal {N}\cap M$
 and 
 $D=N_{C_S(T)}(P)$
. Here M is a subgroup of
$D=N_{C_S(T)}(P)$
. Here M is a subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 as
$\mathcal {L}$
 as 
 $P\in \Delta $
, and then K is a normal subgroup of M by Definition 1.7(d). We have
$P\in \Delta $
, and then K is a normal subgroup of M by Definition 1.7(d). We have 
 $T\trianglelefteq M$
 by Lemma 3.1(a), so
$T\trianglelefteq M$
 by Lemma 3.1(a), so 
 $D\leq C_M(T)$
, and then
$D\leq C_M(T)$
, and then 
 $[K,D]\leq C_K(T)$
. Notice that
$[K,D]\leq C_K(T)$
. Notice that 
 $T\in Syl_p(K)$
 by Lemma 3.1(c), so that
$T\in Syl_p(K)$
 by Lemma 3.1(c), so that 
 $K/T$
 is a
$K/T$
 is a 
 $p'$
-group. Then
$p'$
-group. Then 
 $C_K(T)=Z(T)\times Y$
, where Y is a
$C_K(T)=Z(T)\times Y$
, where Y is a 
 $p'$
-group; and thus Y is a normal
$p'$
-group; and thus Y is a normal 
 $p'$
-subgroup of M. Then
$p'$
-subgroup of M. Then 
 $[O_p(M),Y]=1$
, so
$[O_p(M),Y]=1$
, so 
 $Y\leq O_p(M)$
 by hypothesis, and thus
$Y\leq O_p(M)$
 by hypothesis, and thus 
 $Y=1$
. We then have
$Y=1$
. We then have 
 $[K,D]\leq T$
, so
$[K,D]\leq T$
, so 
 $[g,D]\leq T$
, and
$[g,D]\leq T$
, and 
 $D\leq P$
. As
$D\leq P$
. As 
 $C_S(T)P$
 is a p-group we thereby obtain
$C_S(T)P$
 is a p-group we thereby obtain 
 $C_S(T)\leq P$
. This shows that
$C_S(T)\leq P$
. This shows that 
 $C_S(T)$
 is g-invariant for all
$C_S(T)$
 is g-invariant for all 
 $g\in \mathcal {N}_{\mathcal {N}}(T)$
 and yields the lemma.
$g\in \mathcal {N}_{\mathcal {N}}(T)$
 and yields the lemma.
Definition 3.6. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 be the set of all pairs
$\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 be the set of all pairs 
 $(f,P)\in \mathcal {L}\times \Delta $
 such that
$(f,P)\in \mathcal {L}\times \Delta $
 such that 
 $P\leq S_f$
. Define a relation
$P\leq S_f$
. Define a relation 
 $\uparrow $
 on
$\uparrow $
 on 
 $\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 by
$\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 by 
 $(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
 if there exist elements
$(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
 if there exist elements 
 $x\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(P,Q)$
 and
$x\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(P,Q)$
 and 
 $y\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(P^f,Q^g)$
 such that
$y\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(P^f,Q^g)$
 such that 
 $xg=fy$
.
$xg=fy$
.
This relation may be indicated by means of a commutative square

of conjugation maps, labeled by the conjugating elements, and in which the horizontal arrows are isomorphisms and the vertical arrows are injective homomorphisms. The relation 
 $(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
 may also be expressed by
$(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
 may also be expressed by 
 $$ \begin{align*} w:=(x,g,y^{-1},f^{-1})\in\mathbf{D} \text{ via } P, \text{ and } \Pi(w)=\mathbf{1}. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} w:=(x,g,y^{-1},f^{-1})\in\mathbf{D} \text{ via } P, \text{ and } \Pi(w)=\mathbf{1}. \end{align*} $$
It is easy to see that 
 $\uparrow $
 is reflexive and transitive. We say that
$\uparrow $
 is reflexive and transitive. We say that 
 $(f,P)$
 is maximal in
$(f,P)$
 is maximal in 
 $\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 if
$\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 if 
 $(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
 implies that
$(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
 implies that 
 $|P|=|Q|$
. As S is finite, there exist maximal elements in
$|P|=|Q|$
. As S is finite, there exist maximal elements in 
 $\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
. Since
$\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
. Since 
 $(f,P)\uparrow (f,S_f)$
 for
$(f,P)\uparrow (f,S_f)$
 for 
 $(f,P)\in \mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
, we have
$(f,P)\in \mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
, we have 
 $P=S_f$
 for every maximal
$P=S_f$
 for every maximal 
 $(f,P)$
. For this reason, we will say that f is
$(f,P)$
. For this reason, we will say that f is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal in
$\uparrow $
-maximal in 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 (with respect to
$\mathcal {L}$
 (with respect to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
) if
$\mathcal {N}$
) if 
 $(f,S_f)$
 is maximal in
$(f,S_f)$
 is maximal in 
 $\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
.
$\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
.
Lemma 3.7. Let 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
.
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
. 
- 
(a) If  $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
, then f is $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
, then f is $\uparrow $
-maximal. $\uparrow $
-maximal.
- 
(b) If f is  $\uparrow $
-maximal, then so is $\uparrow $
-maximal, then so is $f^{-1}$
. $f^{-1}$
.
- 
(c) If f is  $\uparrow $
-maximal and $\uparrow $
-maximal and $(f,S_f)\uparrow (g,Q)$
, then g is $(f,S_f)\uparrow (g,Q)$
, then g is $\uparrow $
-maximal, $\uparrow $
-maximal, $Q=S_g$
, and $Q=S_g$
, and $(g,Q)\uparrow (f,S_f)$
. $(g,Q)\uparrow (f,S_f)$
.
Proof. Point (a) is immediate from Definition 3.6. Now suppose that f is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal, and let
$\uparrow $
-maximal, and let 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 with
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 with 
 $(f^{-1},S_{f^{-1}})\uparrow (g^{-1},S_{g^{-1}})$
. Since
$(f^{-1},S_{f^{-1}})\uparrow (g^{-1},S_{g^{-1}})$
. Since 
 $S_{f^{-1}}=(S_f)^f$
 and
$S_{f^{-1}}=(S_f)^f$
 and 
 $S_{g^{-1}}=(S_g)^g$
, one obtains a diagram
$S_{g^{-1}}=(S_g)^g$
, one obtains a diagram 

as in Definition 3.6, from which it is easy to read off the relation 
 $(f,S_f)\uparrow (g,S_g)$
. Then
$(f,S_f)\uparrow (g,S_g)$
. Then 
 $|S_f|=|S_g|$
 as f is
$|S_f|=|S_g|$
 as f is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal, and then also
$\uparrow $
-maximal, and then also 
 $|S_{f^{-1}}|=|S_{g^{-1}}|$
. Thus
$|S_{f^{-1}}|=|S_{g^{-1}}|$
. Thus 
 $f^{-1}$
 is
$f^{-1}$
 is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal, and (b) holds. Point (c) is immediate from the transitivity of
$\uparrow $
-maximal, and (b) holds. Point (c) is immediate from the transitivity of 
 $\uparrow $
.
$\uparrow $
.
Lemma 3.8. Let 
 $(g,Q),(h,R)\in \mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 with
$(g,Q),(h,R)\in \mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 with 
 $(g,Q)\uparrow (h,R)$
, and suppose that
$(g,Q)\uparrow (h,R)$
, and suppose that 
 $T\leq R$
. Then there exists a unique
$T\leq R$
. Then there exists a unique 
 $y\in \mathcal {N}$
 with
$y\in \mathcal {N}$
 with 
 $g=yh$
. Moreover,
$g=yh$
. Moreover, 
- 
(a)  $Q^y\leq R$
, and $Q^y\leq R$
, and $Q\leq S_{(y,h)}$
. $Q\leq S_{(y,h)}$
.
- 
(b) If  $N_T(Q^g)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^g))$
, then $N_T(Q^g)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^g))$
, then $N_T(Q^y)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^y))$
. $N_T(Q^y)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^y))$
.
Proof. By definition of the relation 
 $\uparrow $
, there exist elements
$\uparrow $
, there exist elements 
 $u\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q,R)$
 and
$u\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q,R)$
 and 
 $v\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^g,R^h)$
 such that
$v\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^g,R^h)$
 such that 
 $(u,h,v^{-1},g^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Q and
$(u,h,v^{-1},g^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Q and 
 $\Pi (w)=\mathbf {1}$
.
$\Pi (w)=\mathbf {1}$
. 

In particular, 
 $uh=gv$
. Since
$uh=gv$
. Since 
 $T\leq R$
, points (a) and (b) of Lemma 3.1 yield
$T\leq R$
, points (a) and (b) of Lemma 3.1 yield 
 $$ \begin{align*} T=T^h, Q^uT=QT\leq R, \text{ and } Q^gT=Q^{gv}T\leq R^h. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} T=T^h, Q^uT=QT\leq R, \text{ and } Q^gT=Q^{gv}T\leq R^h. \end{align*} $$
Then
 $$ \begin{align*} w:=(u,h,v^{-1},h^{-1})\in\mathbf{D}\quad{\text via}\quad (Q,Q^u,Q^{uh},Q^{uhv^{-1}}=Q^g,Q^{gh^{-1}}). \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*} w:=(u,h,v^{-1},h^{-1})\in\mathbf{D}\quad{\text via}\quad (Q,Q^u,Q^{uh},Q^{uhv^{-1}}=Q^g,Q^{gh^{-1}}). \end{align*} $$
Set 
 $y=\Pi (w)$
. Then
$y=\Pi (w)$
. Then 
 $y=u(v^{-1})^{h^{-1}}\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q,R)$
. Since
$y=u(v^{-1})^{h^{-1}}\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q,R)$
. Since 
 $(u,h,v^{-1},h^{-1},h)$
 and
$(u,h,v^{-1},h^{-1},h)$
 and 
 $(g,v,v^{-1})$
 are in
$(g,v,v^{-1})$
 are in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 (as
$\mathbf {D}$
 (as 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is a partial group), we get
$\mathcal {L}$
 is a partial group), we get 
 $yh=uhv^{-1}=g$
. This yields (a). The uniqueness of y is given by right cancellation.
$yh=uhv^{-1}=g$
. This yields (a). The uniqueness of y is given by right cancellation.
 Suppose now that 
 $N_T(Q^g)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^g))$
. As
$N_T(Q^g)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^g))$
. As 
 $N_T(Q^y)^h=N_T(Q^g)$
, it follows from Lemma 2.3(b) that
$N_T(Q^y)^h=N_T(Q^g)$
, it follows from Lemma 2.3(b) that 
 $N_T(Q^y)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^y))$
.
$N_T(Q^y)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q^y))$
.
Proposition 3.9. Let 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 and suppose that g is
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 and suppose that g is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to
$\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. Then
$\mathcal {N}$
. Then 
 $T\leq S_g$
.
$T\leq S_g$
.
Proof. Set 
 $P=S_g$
 and
$P=S_g$
 and 
 $Q=P^g$
. We first show
$Q=P^g$
. We first show 
- 
(1) Let  $y\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(P,S)$
. Then $y\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(P,S)$
. Then $|T\cap P|=|T\cap P^y|$
 and $|T\cap P|=|T\cap P^y|$
 and $(g,P)\uparrow (y^{-1} g,P^y)$
. In particular, $(g,P)\uparrow (y^{-1} g,P^y)$
. In particular, $y^{-1} g$
 is $y^{-1} g$
 is $\uparrow $
-maximal. $\uparrow $
-maximal.
We have 
 $|T\cap P|=|T\cap P^y|$
 by Lemma 3.1(a). The following diagram
$|T\cap P|=|T\cap P^y|$
 by Lemma 3.1(a). The following diagram 

shows that 
 $(g,P)\uparrow (y^{-1} g,P^y)$
, and then
$(g,P)\uparrow (y^{-1} g,P^y)$
, and then 
 $y^{-1} g$
 is
$y^{-1} g$
 is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal by Lemma 3.7(c). Thus (1) holds.
$\uparrow $
-maximal by Lemma 3.7(c). Thus (1) holds.
 Suppose next that 
 $N_T(P)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(P))$
. Then
$N_T(P)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(P))$
. Then 
 $N_T(P)^g\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q))$
, by Lemma 2.3(b), and there exists
$N_T(P)^g\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q))$
, by Lemma 2.3(b), and there exists 
 $x\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q)$
 such that
$x\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q)$
 such that 
 $N_T(Q)^x\leq N_T(P)^g$
. Here
$N_T(Q)^x\leq N_T(P)^g$
. Here 
 $(x,g^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Q, and we get
$(x,g^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Q, and we get 
 $N_T(Q)^{xg^{-1}}\leq N_T(P)\leq S$
. Thus
$N_T(Q)^{xg^{-1}}\leq N_T(P)\leq S$
. Thus 
 $(g^{-1},Q)\uparrow (xg^{-1},N_T(Q)Q)$
. As
$(g^{-1},Q)\uparrow (xg^{-1},N_T(Q)Q)$
. As 
 $g^{-1}$
 is
$g^{-1}$
 is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal by Lemma 3.7, it follows that
$\uparrow $
-maximal by Lemma 3.7, it follows that 
 $N_T(Q)\leq Q$
. As
$N_T(Q)\leq Q$
. As 
 $TQ$
 is a p-group, we then have
$TQ$
 is a p-group, we then have 
 $T\leq Q$
, so
$T\leq Q$
, so 
 $T\leq P$
. We have thus shown
$T\leq P$
. We have thus shown 
- 
(2) If  $T\nleq P$
, then $T\nleq P$
, then $N_T(P)\notin Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(P))$
. $N_T(P)\notin Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(P))$
.
We next show
- 
(3) Suppose that there exists  $y\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that $y\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that $P\leq S_y$
 and such that $P\leq S_y$
 and such that $N_T(P^y)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(P^y))$
. Then $N_T(P^y)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(P^y))$
. Then $T\leq P$
. $T\leq P$
.
Indeed, under the hypothesis of (3), we have 
 $(g,P)\uparrow (y^{-1} g,P^y)$
 by (1). Then
$(g,P)\uparrow (y^{-1} g,P^y)$
 by (1). Then 
 $(y^{-1} g,P^y)$
 is maximal in
$(y^{-1} g,P^y)$
 is maximal in 
 $\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
, and
$\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
, and 
 $P^y=S_{y^{-1} g}$
. If
$P^y=S_{y^{-1} g}$
. If 
 $T\nleq P$
, then
$T\nleq P$
, then 
 $T\nleq P^y$
, and then (2) applies to
$T\nleq P^y$
, and then (2) applies to 
 $(y^{-1} g,P^y)$
 in the role of
$(y^{-1} g,P^y)$
 in the role of 
 $(g,P)$
 and yields a contradiction. So, (3) holds.
$(g,P)$
 and yields a contradiction. So, (3) holds.
 Among all counterexamples, let g be chosen so that 
 $|P|$
 is as large as possible. By Lemma 2.9, there exists
$|P|$
 is as large as possible. By Lemma 2.9, there exists 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
 so that
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
 so that 
 $Q^f\leq S$
 and
$Q^f\leq S$
 and 
 $N_S(Q^f)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q^f))$
. Set
$N_S(Q^f)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q^f))$
. Set 
 $h=gf$
 (where the product is defined via P) and set
$h=gf$
 (where the product is defined via P) and set 
 $R=P^h$
. Let
$R=P^h$
. Let 
 $(h',P')$
 be maximal in
$(h',P')$
 be maximal in 
 $\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 with
$\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 with 
 $(h,P)\uparrow (h',P')$
. We note that since
$(h,P)\uparrow (h',P')$
. We note that since 
 $R=P^h=Q^f$
, we have
$R=P^h=Q^f$
, we have 
 $N_T(R)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(R))$
. So, if
$N_T(R)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(R))$
. So, if 
 $T\leq P'$
, then Lemma 3.8(b) applies and yields
$T\leq P'$
, then Lemma 3.8(b) applies and yields 
 $h=yh'$
 for some
$h=yh'$
 for some 
 $y\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that
$y\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that 
 $P\leq S_y$
 and such that
$P\leq S_y$
 and such that 
 $N_T(P^y)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(P^y))$
. The existence of such an element y contradicts (3), so we conclude that
$N_T(P^y)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(P^y))$
. The existence of such an element y contradicts (3), so we conclude that 
 $T\nleq P'$
. Then
$T\nleq P'$
. Then 
 $(h',P')$
 is a counterexample to the proposition, and the maximality of
$(h',P')$
 is a counterexample to the proposition, and the maximality of 
 $|P|$
 yields
$|P|$
 yields 
 $|P|=|P'|$
. Then
$|P|=|P'|$
. Then 
 $(h,P)$
 is maximal in
$(h,P)$
 is maximal in 
 $\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
, as is
$\mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
, as is 
 $(h^{-1},R)$
 by Lemma 3.7(b), so
$(h^{-1},R)$
 by Lemma 3.7(b), so 
 $T\nleq R$
. But
$T\nleq R$
. But 
 $N_T(R)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(R))$
, so (2) applies with
$N_T(R)\in Syl_p(N_{\mathcal {N}}(R))$
, so (2) applies with 
 $(h^{-1},R)$
 in the role of
$(h^{-1},R)$
 in the role of 
 $(g,P)$
 and yields
$(g,P)$
 and yields 
 $T\leq R$
. Then
$T\leq R$
. Then 
 $T\leq P$
, and the proof is complete.
$T\leq P$
, and the proof is complete.
Lemma 3.10. Suppose that 
 $N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
. Then every element of
$N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
. Then every element of 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 is
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to
$\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
.
$\mathcal {N}$
.
Proof. Let 
 $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, and set
$f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, and set 
 $P=S_f$
. Then
$P=S_f$
. Then 
 $T\leq P$
 and
$T\leq P$
 and 
 $T\leq P^f$
. Let
$T\leq P^f$
. Let 
 $(g,Q)\in \mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 with
$(g,Q)\in \mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 with 
 $(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
, and let
$(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
, and let 
 $x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
 be chosen as in Definition 3.6. Then
$x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
 be chosen as in Definition 3.6. Then 
 $P\leq Q$
 by Proposition 3.9, and we have
$P\leq Q$
 by Proposition 3.9, and we have 
 $P=P^x$
 and
$P=P^x$
 and 
 $(P^f)^y=P^f\leq Q^g$
 by Lemma 3.1(b). To show that f is
$(P^f)^y=P^f\leq Q^g$
 by Lemma 3.1(b). To show that f is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal, it suffices now to show that
$\uparrow $
-maximal, it suffices now to show that 
 $P=Q$
, and hence it suffices to show that
$P=Q$
, and hence it suffices to show that 
 $N_Q(P)\leq P$
.
$N_Q(P)\leq P$
.
 Set 
 $D=N_Q(P)$
. Then
$D=N_Q(P)$
. Then 
 $T\leq P\leq D\leq S_x$
, so Lemma 3.1(b) implies that
$T\leq P\leq D\leq S_x$
, so Lemma 3.1(b) implies that 
 $x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(D)$
. Since
$x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(D)$
. Since 
 $y\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
, we obtain
$y\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
, we obtain 
 $(x,g,y^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 via D. As
$(x,g,y^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 via D. As 
 $xg=fy$
 by the setup of Definition 3.6, we then have
$xg=fy$
 by the setup of Definition 3.6, we then have 
 $xgy^{-1}=f$
 by Lemma 1.3(g), and thus
$xgy^{-1}=f$
 by Lemma 1.3(g), and thus 
 $D\leq S_f$
. That is, we have
$D\leq S_f$
. That is, we have 
 $N_Q(P)\leq P$
, as required.
$N_Q(P)\leq P$
, as required.
 If X and Y are subsets of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, then one has the notion of the product
$\mathcal {L}$
, then one has the notion of the product 
 $XY$
, introduced in Section 1, as the set of all
$XY$
, introduced in Section 1, as the set of all 
 $\Pi (x,y)$
 with
$\Pi (x,y)$
 with 
 $(x,y)\in \mathbf {D}\cap (X\times Y)$
.
$(x,y)\in \mathbf {D}\cap (X\times Y)$
.
Corollary 3.11 Frattini lemma
 Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be a partial normal subgroup, and let
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be a partial normal subgroup, and let 
 $\Lambda $
 be the set of
$\Lambda $
 be the set of 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal elements of
$\uparrow $
-maximal elements of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 with respect to
$\mathcal {L}$
 with respect to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. Then
$\mathcal {N}$
. Then 
 $\mathcal {L}=\mathcal {N}\Lambda =\Lambda \mathcal {N}$
. In particular, we have
$\mathcal {L}=\mathcal {N}\Lambda =\Lambda \mathcal {N}$
. In particular, we have 
 $\mathcal {L}=N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)\mathcal {N}=\mathcal {N} N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
.
$\mathcal {L}=N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)\mathcal {N}=\mathcal {N} N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
.
Proof. Let 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
, set
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
, set 
 $P=S_f$
, and choose
$P=S_f$
, and choose 
 $(g,Q)\in \mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 so that
$(g,Q)\in \mathcal {L}\circ \Delta $
 so that 
 $(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
 and g is
$(f,P)\uparrow (g,Q)$
 and g is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal. By Proposition 3.9, we have
$\uparrow $
-maximal. By Proposition 3.9, we have 
 $\Lambda \subseteq N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 and
$\Lambda \subseteq N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 and 
 $T\leq S_g=Q$
, so Lemma 3.8 yields
$T\leq S_g=Q$
, so Lemma 3.8 yields 
 $f=xg$
 for some
$f=xg$
 for some 
 $x\in \mathcal {N}$
, and then Lemma 3.2 shows that
$x\in \mathcal {N}$
, and then Lemma 3.2 shows that 
 $f=gy$
, where
$f=gy$
, where 
 $y=x^g$
.
$y=x^g$
.
The following result will be seen to play a crucial role in the theory being developed here. It was discovered and proved by Stellmacher in his reading of an early draft of [Reference ChermakCh1]. The proof given here is his.
Lemma 3.12 (splitting lemma)
 Let 
 $(x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
 with
$(x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
 with 
 $x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and with
$x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and with 
 $f \ \uparrow $
-maximal with respect to
$f \ \uparrow $
-maximal with respect to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. Then
$\mathcal {N}$
. Then 
 $S_{(x,f)}=S_{xf}=S_{(f,x^f)}$
.
$S_{(x,f)}=S_{xf}=S_{(f,x^f)}$
.
Proof. Set 
 $Q=S_{(x,f)}$
. Since
$Q=S_{(x,f)}$
. Since 
 $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 by Proposition 3.9, we may appeal to Lemma 3.2(a) and obtain
$f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 by Proposition 3.9, we may appeal to Lemma 3.2(a) and obtain 
- 
(1)  $y:=x^f$
 is defined and, upon setting $y:=x^f$
 is defined and, upon setting $g=xf$
, we have $g=xf$
, we have $g=fy$
 and $g=fy$
 and $Q=S_{(f,y)}$
. $Q=S_{(f,y)}$
.
Thus, the problem is to show that 
 $Q=S_g$
. By (1), we have
$Q=S_g$
. By (1), we have 
 $Q\leq S_f\cap S_g$
, and Lemma 3.2(a) yields the further result that
$Q\leq S_f\cap S_g$
, and Lemma 3.2(a) yields the further result that 
 $Q=S_f\cap S_x$
. Set
$Q=S_f\cap S_x$
. Set 
 $$ \begin{align*}P_0=N_{S_f}(Q),\ \ P_1=N_{S_g}(Q),\ \ P=\langle P_0,P_1\rangle, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}P_0=N_{S_f}(Q),\ \ P_1=N_{S_g}(Q),\ \ P=\langle P_0,P_1\rangle, \end{align*} $$
and set 
 $R=P_0\cap P_1$
. Then
$R=P_0\cap P_1$
. Then 
 $Q\leq R$
. In fact, Lemma 2.3(b) shows that
$Q\leq R$
. In fact, Lemma 2.3(b) shows that 
 $y=f^{-1} g$
 and that
$y=f^{-1} g$
 and that 
 $(R^f)^y=R^g$
, so
$(R^f)^y=R^g$
, so 
 $R\leq Q$
, and thus
$R\leq Q$
, and thus 
 $P_0\cap P_1=Q$
.
$P_0\cap P_1=Q$
.
 Assume now that 
 $(x,f)$
 is a counterexample to the lemma. That is, assume
$(x,f)$
 is a counterexample to the lemma. That is, assume 
 $Q<S_g$
 (proper inclusion). Then
$Q<S_g$
 (proper inclusion). Then 
 $Q<P_1$
, so
$Q<P_1$
, so 
 $P_1\nleq P_0$
. Thus
$P_1\nleq P_0$
. Thus 
- 
(2)  $P_1\nleq S_f$
. $P_1\nleq S_f$
.
We consider two cases, as follows.
Case 1. 
 $x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
.
$x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
.
 Among all counterexamples to case 1, take 
 $(x,f)$
 so that
$(x,f)$
 so that 
 $|Q|$
 is as large as possible. As
$|Q|$
 is as large as possible. As 
 $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 (Lemma 3.5), we have
$f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 (Lemma 3.5), we have 
 $T\leq Q$
, and then
$T\leq Q$
, and then 
 $x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
 by Lemma 3.1(b). Thus
$x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
 by Lemma 3.1(b). Thus 
 $Q^g=Q^{xf}=Q^f$
. Set
$Q^g=Q^{xf}=Q^f$
. Set 
 $Q'=Q^g$
. Then Lemma 2.3(b) yields an isomorphism
$Q'=Q^g$
. Then Lemma 2.3(b) yields an isomorphism 
 $c_f:N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)\to N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q')$
. Here
$c_f:N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)\to N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q')$
. Here 
 $f=x^{-1} g$
 so
$f=x^{-1} g$
 so 
 $c_f=c_{x^{-1}}\circ c_g$
 by Lemma 2.3(c). As
$c_f=c_{x^{-1}}\circ c_g$
 by Lemma 2.3(c). As 
 $x\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q)\trianglelefteq N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
, we obtain
$x\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q)\trianglelefteq N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
, we obtain 
 $(P_1)^{x^{-1}}\leq N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q)P_1$
, and then
$(P_1)^{x^{-1}}\leq N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q)P_1$
, and then 
 $$ \begin{align*}(P_1)^f=((P_1)^{x^{-1}})^g\leq (N_{\mathcal{N}}(Q)P_1)^g\leq N_{\mathcal{N}}(Q')N_S(Q'). \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}(P_1)^f=((P_1)^{x^{-1}})^g\leq (N_{\mathcal{N}}(Q)P_1)^g\leq N_{\mathcal{N}}(Q')N_S(Q'). \end{align*} $$
Also 
 $(P_0)^f\leq N_S(Q')$
, so
$(P_0)^f\leq N_S(Q')$
, so 
- 
(3)  $P^f\leq N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q')N_S(Q')$
. $P^f\leq N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q')N_S(Q')$
.
Since 
 $T\leq Q'$
, T is a Sylow p-subgroup of
$T\leq Q'$
, T is a Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q')$
 by Lemma 3.1(c), and thus
$N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q')$
 by Lemma 3.1(c), and thus 
 $N_S(Q')$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of
$N_S(Q')$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q')N_S(Q')$
. By (3) and Sylow’s theorem, there is then an element
$N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q')N_S(Q')$
. By (3) and Sylow’s theorem, there is then an element 
 $v\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q')$
 such that
$v\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(Q')$
 such that 
 $P^{fv}\leq N_S(Q')$
. In particular, we have
$P^{fv}\leq N_S(Q')$
. In particular, we have 
- 
(4)  $P_0\leq S_{(f,v)}$
 and $P_0\leq S_{(f,v)}$
 and $P\leq S_{fv}$
. $P\leq S_{fv}$
.
Set 
 $u=v^{f^{-1}}$
. Then
$u=v^{f^{-1}}$
. Then 
 $(u,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and we have
$(u,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and we have 
 $uf=fv$
 and
$uf=fv$
 and 
 $S_{(u,f)}=S_{(f,v)}$
 by Lemma 3.2. If
$S_{(u,f)}=S_{(f,v)}$
 by Lemma 3.2. If 
 $S_{(f,v)}=S_{fv}$
, then
$S_{(f,v)}=S_{fv}$
, then 
 $(f,v)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via P, so that
$(f,v)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via P, so that 
 $P\leq S_f$
, contrary to (2). Thus
$P\leq S_f$
, contrary to (2). Thus 
 $S_{(f,v)}\neq S_{fv}$
, so
$S_{(f,v)}\neq S_{fv}$
, so 
 $(u,f)$
 is a counterexample to the lemma. Then (4) and the maximality of
$(u,f)$
 is a counterexample to the lemma. Then (4) and the maximality of 
 $|Q|$
 in the choice of
$|Q|$
 in the choice of 
 $(x,f)$
 yields
$(x,f)$
 yields 
 $Q=P_0=N_{S_f}(Q)$
, so
$Q=P_0=N_{S_f}(Q)$
, so 
 $Q=S_f$
. As
$Q=S_f$
. As 
 $(f,Q)\uparrow (g,P)$
 via
$(f,Q)\uparrow (g,P)$
 via 
 $(x^{-1},\mathbf {1})$
, we have contradicted the
$(x^{-1},\mathbf {1})$
, we have contradicted the 
 $\uparrow $
-maximality of f.
$\uparrow $
-maximality of f.
Case 2. The case 
 $x\notin N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
.
$x\notin N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
.
 Again, among all counterexamples, take 
 $(x,f)$
 so that
$(x,f)$
 so that 
 $|Q|$
 is as large as possible. Let h be
$|Q|$
 is as large as possible. Let h be 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal, with
$\uparrow $
-maximal, with 
 $(g,S_g)\uparrow (h,S_h)$
. Then
$(g,S_g)\uparrow (h,S_h)$
. Then 
 $T\leq S_h$
 by Proposition 3.9, and by Lemma 3.8 there exists
$T\leq S_h$
 by Proposition 3.9, and by Lemma 3.8 there exists 
 $r\in \mathcal {N}$
 with
$r\in \mathcal {N}$
 with 
 $g=rh$
. Note that Lemma 3.8(a) also yields
$g=rh$
. Note that Lemma 3.8(a) also yields 
 $S_g=S_{(r,h)}\geq Q=S_{(x,g)}$
.
$S_g=S_{(r,h)}\geq Q=S_{(x,g)}$
.
 Set 
 $w=(f^{-1},x^{-1},r,h)$
, observe that
$w=(f^{-1},x^{-1},r,h)$
, observe that 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $Q^g$
, and find
$Q^g$
, and find 
 $$ \begin{align*}\Pi(w)=(f^{-1} x^{-1})(rh)=g^{-1} g=\mathbf{1}. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}\Pi(w)=(f^{-1} x^{-1})(rh)=g^{-1} g=\mathbf{1}. \end{align*} $$
Then 
 $h=r^{-1} xf$
 and
$h=r^{-1} xf$
 and 
 $hf^{-1}=r^{-1} x$
 by Lemma 2.4(a). Since both f and h are in
$hf^{-1}=r^{-1} x$
 by Lemma 2.4(a). Since both f and h are in 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, we obtain
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, we obtain 
 $r^{-1} x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, so
$r^{-1} x\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, so 
 $r^{-1} x\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)$
. Now case 1 applies, with
$r^{-1} x\in N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)$
. Now case 1 applies, with 
 $(r^{-1} x,f)$
 in the role of
$(r^{-1} x,f)$
 in the role of 
 $(x,f)$
, and thus
$(x,f)$
, and thus 
 $S_h=S_{(r^{-1} x,f)}\leq S_f$
 (using Lemma 3.2). By definition of
$S_h=S_{(r^{-1} x,f)}\leq S_f$
 (using Lemma 3.2). By definition of 
 $\uparrow $
, there exist
$\uparrow $
, there exist 
 $a,b\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that one has the usual commutative diagram:
$a,b\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that one has the usual commutative diagram: 

As 
 $T\leq S_h$
, Lemma 3.1(b) yields
$T\leq S_h$
, Lemma 3.1(b) yields 
 $$ \begin{align*}S_g\leq S_gT=(S_g)^aT\leq S_h, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}S_g\leq S_gT=(S_g)^aT\leq S_h, \end{align*} $$
so 
 $S_g\leq S_f$
. This again contradicts (1) and completes the proof.
$S_g\leq S_f$
. This again contradicts (1) and completes the proof.
The splitting lemma yields a useful criterion for partial normality, as follows.
Corollary 3.13. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a locality, let
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a locality, let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and let
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and let 
 $\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {N}$
 be a partial normal subgroup of
$\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {N}$
 be a partial normal subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. Suppose that
$\mathcal {N}$
. Suppose that 
 $\mathcal {K}$
 is
$\mathcal {K}$
 is 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
-invariant. That is, suppose that
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
-invariant. That is, suppose that 
 $x^h\in \mathcal {K}$
 for all
$x^h\in \mathcal {K}$
 for all 
 $(h^{-1},x,h)\in \mathbf {D}$
 such that
$(h^{-1},x,h)\in \mathbf {D}$
 such that 
 $x\in \mathcal {K}$
 and
$x\in \mathcal {K}$
 and 
 $h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T).$
 Then
$h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T).$
 Then 
 $\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
Proof. Let 
 $x\in \mathcal {K}$
, and let
$x\in \mathcal {K}$
, and let 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that 
 $x^f$
 is defined. By the Frattini lemma, we may write
$x^f$
 is defined. By the Frattini lemma, we may write 
 $f=yg$
 with
$f=yg$
 with 
 $y\in \mathcal {N}$
 and with
$y\in \mathcal {N}$
 and with 
 $g \ \uparrow $
-maximal, and then the splitting lemma yields
$g \ \uparrow $
-maximal, and then the splitting lemma yields 
 $S_f=S_{(y,g)}$
. Set
$S_f=S_{(y,g)}$
. Set 
 $u=(f^{-1},x,f)$
 and
$u=(f^{-1},x,f)$
 and 
 $v=(g^{-1},y^{-1},x,y,g)$
. Then
$v=(g^{-1},y^{-1},x,y,g)$
. Then 
 $S_u=S_v\in \Delta $
, and
$S_u=S_v\in \Delta $
, and 
 $x^f=\Pi (u)=\Pi (v)=(x^y)^g$
. Thus
$x^f=\Pi (u)=\Pi (v)=(x^y)^g$
. Thus 
 $x^f\in \mathcal {K}$
, and
$x^f\in \mathcal {K}$
, and 
 $\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
 In the notation introduced following Lemma 1.4, for each 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
, we have the coset
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
, we have the coset 
 $\mathcal {N}f$
 of
$\mathcal {N}f$
 of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 consisting of the elements
$\mathcal {N}$
 consisting of the elements 
 $\Pi (x,f)$
 such that
$\Pi (x,f)$
 such that 
 $x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and
$x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and 
 $(x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
. A coset
$(x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
. A coset 
 $\mathcal {N}f$
 is called maximal if it is not a proper subset of any coset of
$\mathcal {N}f$
 is called maximal if it is not a proper subset of any coset of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
.
$\mathcal {N}$
.
Proposition 3.14. The following hold.
- 
(a)  $\mathcal {N}f=f\mathcal {N}$
 for all $\mathcal {N}f=f\mathcal {N}$
 for all $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, and if f is $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, and if f is $\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to $\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to $\mathcal {N}$
, then $\mathcal {N}$
, then $\mathcal {N}f=\mathcal {N} f\mathcal {N}=f\mathcal {N}$
. $\mathcal {N}f=\mathcal {N} f\mathcal {N}=f\mathcal {N}$
.
- 
(b) Let  $f,g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and assume that f is $f,g\in \mathcal {L}$
, and assume that f is $\uparrow $
-maximal. Then $\uparrow $
-maximal. Then $$ \begin{align*}(g,S_g)\uparrow(f,S_f)\ \iff\ \mathcal{N}g\subseteq\mathcal{N}f\ \iff\ g\in\mathcal{N}f. \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*}(g,S_g)\uparrow(f,S_f)\ \iff\ \mathcal{N}g\subseteq\mathcal{N}f\ \iff\ g\in\mathcal{N}f. \end{align*} $$
- 
(c) If  $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 is $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 is $\uparrow $
-maximal relative to $\uparrow $
-maximal relative to $\mathcal {N}$
, then $\mathcal {N}$
, then $\mathcal {N}g$
 is a maximal coset of $\mathcal {N}g$
 is a maximal coset of $\mathcal {N}$
. Moreover, every maximal coset of $\mathcal {N}$
. Moreover, every maximal coset of $\mathcal {N}$
 is of the form $\mathcal {N}$
 is of the form $\mathcal {N}f$
 for some $\mathcal {N}f$
 for some $\uparrow $
-maximal element f. $\uparrow $
-maximal element f.
- 
(d)  $\mathcal {L}$
 is partitioned by the set $\mathcal {L}$
 is partitioned by the set $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of maximal cosets of $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of maximal cosets of $\mathcal {N}$
. $\mathcal {N}$
.
- 
(e) Let  $u:=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and let $u:=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and let $v:=(f_1,\cdots ,f_n)$
 be a sequence of $v:=(f_1,\cdots ,f_n)$
 be a sequence of $\uparrow $
-maximal elements of $\uparrow $
-maximal elements of $\mathcal {L}$
 such that $\mathcal {L}$
 such that $g_i\in \mathcal {N}f_i$
 for all i. Then $g_i\in \mathcal {N}f_i$
 for all i. Then $v\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $v\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $TS_u$
, and $TS_u$
, and $\Pi (u)\in \mathcal {N}\Pi (v)$
. $\Pi (u)\in \mathcal {N}\Pi (v)$
.
Proof.
- 
(a) That  $\mathcal {N}f=f\mathcal {N}$
 for $\mathcal {N}f=f\mathcal {N}$
 for $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 is given by Lemma 3.2. Now let f be $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 is given by Lemma 3.2. Now let f be $\uparrow $
-maximal (relative to $\uparrow $
-maximal (relative to $\mathcal {N}$
). Then $\mathcal {N}$
). Then $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 by Proposition 3.9. Let $f\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 by Proposition 3.9. Let $x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that $x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that $(x,f,y)\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then $(x,f,y)\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then $(x,fy)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $(x,fy)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $(x,fy)=(x,y'f)$
, where $(x,fy)=(x,y'f)$
, where $y'=fyf^{-1}$
. The splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12) then yields $y'=fyf^{-1}$
. The splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12) then yields $(x,y',f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and thus $(x,y',f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and thus $\mathcal {N}f\mathcal {N}\subseteq \mathcal {N}f$
. The reverse inclusion is obvious and yields (a). $\mathcal {N}f\mathcal {N}\subseteq \mathcal {N}f$
. The reverse inclusion is obvious and yields (a).
- 
(b) Suppose that  $(g,S_g)\uparrow (f,S_f)$
. By Definition 3.6, there then exist $(g,S_g)\uparrow (f,S_f)$
. By Definition 3.6, there then exist $a,b\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that both $a,b\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that both $(a,f)$
 and $(a,f)$
 and $(g,b)$
 are in $(g,b)$
 are in $\mathbf {D}$
 via $\mathbf {D}$
 via $S_g$
 and with $S_g$
 and with $af=gb$
. Then $af=gb$
. Then $(a,f,b^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $(a,f,b^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
 via $S_g$
, and $S_g$
, and $afb^{-1}=g$
. Thus $afb^{-1}=g$
. Thus $g\in \mathcal {N}f\mathcal {N}$
, so $g\in \mathcal {N}f\mathcal {N}$
, so $g\in \mathcal {N}f$
 by (a). Write $g\in \mathcal {N}f$
 by (a). Write $g=xf$
 with $g=xf$
 with $x\in \mathcal {N}$
. Then Lemma 3.12 yields $x\in \mathcal {N}$
. Then Lemma 3.12 yields $S_g=S_{(x,f)}\leq S_f$
. Let $S_g=S_{(x,f)}\leq S_f$
. Let $y\in \mathcal {N}$
 with $y\in \mathcal {N}$
 with $(y,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
. Since $(y,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
. Since $(S_{(y,g)})^y\leq S_g=S_{(x,f)}$
, we get $(S_{(y,g)})^y\leq S_g=S_{(x,f)}$
, we get $(y,x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $(y,x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and $yg=(yx)f\in \mathcal {N}f$
. Thus $yg=(yx)f\in \mathcal {N}f$
. Thus $(g,S_g)\uparrow (f,S_f)\implies \mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}f$
. Clearly $(g,S_g)\uparrow (f,S_f)\implies \mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}f$
. Clearly $\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}f\implies g\in \mathcal {N}f$
. The required circle of implications is then completed by Lemma 3.12. $\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}f\implies g\in \mathcal {N}f$
. The required circle of implications is then completed by Lemma 3.12.
- 
(c) Let g be  $\uparrow $
-maximal, and let $\uparrow $
-maximal, and let $f\in \mathcal {L}$
 with $f\in \mathcal {L}$
 with $\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}f$
. We aim to show that $\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}f$
. We aim to show that $\mathcal {N}g=\mathcal {N}f$
, so as to conclude that $\mathcal {N}g=\mathcal {N}f$
, so as to conclude that $\mathcal {N}g$
 is a maximal coset. To that end, choose $\mathcal {N}g$
 is a maximal coset. To that end, choose $g'\in \mathcal {L}$
 so that $g'\in \mathcal {L}$
 so that $g'$
 is $g'$
 is $\uparrow $
-maximal and $\uparrow $
-maximal and $(f,S_f)\uparrow (g',S_{g'})$
. Then (b) yields $(f,S_f)\uparrow (g',S_{g'})$
. Then (b) yields $\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {N}g'$
, and thus $\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {N}g'$
, and thus $\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}g'$
. Another application of (b) then yields $\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}g'$
. Another application of (b) then yields $(g,S_g)\uparrow (g',S_{g'})$
. As g is $(g,S_g)\uparrow (g',S_{g'})$
. As g is $\uparrow $
-maximal, we now get $\uparrow $
-maximal, we now get $(g',S_g')\uparrow (g,S_g)$
 from Lemma 3.7(c), and then $(g',S_g')\uparrow (g,S_g)$
 from Lemma 3.7(c), and then $\mathcal {N}g'\subseteq \mathcal {N}g$
 by (b). As $\mathcal {N}g'\subseteq \mathcal {N}g$
 by (b). As $\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {N}g'$
, we conclude that $\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {N}g'$
, we conclude that $\mathcal {N}f=\mathcal {N}g$
, and thus $\mathcal {N}f=\mathcal {N}g$
, and thus $\mathcal {N}g$
 is a maximal coset. $\mathcal {N}g$
 is a maximal coset.Now suppose instead that  $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 is given so that $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 is given so that $\mathcal {N}g$
 is a maximal coset, and let $\mathcal {N}g$
 is a maximal coset, and let $f\in \mathcal {L}$
 be $f\in \mathcal {L}$
 be $\uparrow $
-maximal with $\uparrow $
-maximal with $(g,S_g)\uparrow (f,S_f)$
. Then (b) yields $(g,S_g)\uparrow (f,S_f)$
. Then (b) yields $\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}f$
, and then $\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {N}f$
, and then $\mathcal {N}g=\mathcal {N}f$
 by maximality. Thus (c) holds. $\mathcal {N}g=\mathcal {N}f$
 by maximality. Thus (c) holds.
- 
(d) Let X and Y be maximal cosets of  $\mathcal {N}$
, and let $\mathcal {N}$
, and let $h\in X\cap Y$
. By (c), we have $h\in X\cap Y$
. By (c), we have $X=\mathcal {N}f$
 and $X=\mathcal {N}f$
 and $Y=\mathcal {N}g$
 for some $Y=\mathcal {N}g$
 for some $\uparrow $
-maximal elements f and g. Thus there exist $\uparrow $
-maximal elements f and g. Thus there exist $x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
 with $x,y\in \mathcal {N}$
 with $(x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, $(x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, $(y,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and with $(y,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and with $h=xf=yg$
. Then also $h=xf=yg$
. Then also $(x^{-1},x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, so $(x^{-1},x,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
, so $(x^{-1},yg)=(x^{-1},xf)\in \mathbf {D}$
. The splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12) then yields $(x^{-1},yg)=(x^{-1},xf)\in \mathbf {D}$
. The splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12) then yields $(x^{-1},y,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and we thereby obtain $(x^{-1},y,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
, and we thereby obtain $f=x^{-1} yg\in \mathcal {N}g$
. Now (b) implies that $f=x^{-1} yg\in \mathcal {N}g$
. Now (b) implies that $\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {N}g$
, and symmetry gives the reverse inclusion. Thus $\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {N}g$
, and symmetry gives the reverse inclusion. Thus $\mathcal {N}f=\mathcal {N}g$
 if $\mathcal {N}f=\mathcal {N}g$
 if $\mathcal {N}f\cap \mathcal {N}g\neq \emptyset $
. $\mathcal {N}f\cap \mathcal {N}g\neq \emptyset $
.
- 
(e) Let  $x_i\in \mathcal {N}$
 with $x_i\in \mathcal {N}$
 with $g_i=f_ix_i$
, and set $g_i=f_ix_i$
, and set $w=(f_1,x_1,\cdots ,f_n,g_n)$
. Then $w=(f_1,x_1,\cdots ,f_n,g_n)$
. Then $S_{g_i}=S_{(f_i,x_i)}$
 by Lemma 3.12, so $S_{g_i}=S_{(f_i,x_i)}$
 by Lemma 3.12, so $S_w=S_u$
. Thus $S_w=S_u$
. Thus $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, so by Lemma 3.4 there exists $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, so by Lemma 3.4 there exists $x\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that $x\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that $S_w=S_{v\circ (x)}$
, and with $S_w=S_{v\circ (x)}$
, and with $\Pi (w)=\Pi (v)x$
. Here $\Pi (w)=\Pi (v)x$
. Here $T\leq S_v$
 by Proposition 3.9, so $T\leq S_v$
 by Proposition 3.9, so $TS_u\leq S_v$
. As $TS_u\leq S_v$
. As $\Pi (u)=\Pi (w)$
 by $\Pi (u)=\Pi (w)$
 by $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity, we have $\mathbf {D}$
-associativity, we have $\Pi (u)=\Pi (v)x\in \Pi (v)\mathcal {N}$
. Then $\Pi (u)=\Pi (v)x\in \Pi (v)\mathcal {N}$
. Then $\Pi (u)\in \mathcal {N}\Pi (v)$
 by (a). $\Pi (u)\in \mathcal {N}\Pi (v)$
 by (a).
Lemma 3.15. Let 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 be a partial subgroup of the locality
$\mathcal {H}$
 be a partial subgroup of the locality 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 containing the partial normal subgroup
$\mathcal {L}$
 containing the partial normal subgroup 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Then
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Then 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 is the disjoint union of the maximal cosets of
$\mathcal {H}$
 is the disjoint union of the maximal cosets of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 contained in
$\mathcal {N}$
 contained in 
 $\mathcal {H}$
.
$\mathcal {H}$
.
Proof. Let 
 $f\in \mathcal {H}$
. Apply the Frattini lemma (Corollary 3.11) to obtain
$f\in \mathcal {H}$
. Apply the Frattini lemma (Corollary 3.11) to obtain 
 $f=xh$
 for some
$f=xh$
 for some 
 $x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and some
$x\in \mathcal {N}$
 and some 
 $h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 such that h is
$h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
 such that h is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to
$\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. Then
$\mathcal {N}$
. Then 
 $h=x^{-1} f$
 by Lemma 1.4(d), and thus
$h=x^{-1} f$
 by Lemma 1.4(d), and thus 
 $h\in \mathcal {H}$
 as
$h\in \mathcal {H}$
 as 
 $\mathcal {N}\leq \mathcal {H}$
. Then also
$\mathcal {N}\leq \mathcal {H}$
. Then also 
 $\mathcal {N}h\subseteq \mathcal {H}$
, where
$\mathcal {N}h\subseteq \mathcal {H}$
, where 
 $\mathcal {N}h$
 is a maximal coset of
$\mathcal {N}h$
 is a maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 by Proposition 3.14(c).
$\mathcal {N}$
 by Proposition 3.14(c).
 The set 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of maximal cosets of
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of maximal cosets of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 may also be denoted
$\mathcal {N}$
 may also be denoted 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Let
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Let 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be the mapping that sends
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be the mapping that sends 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 to the unique maximal coset of
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 to the unique maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 containing g. Set
$\mathcal {N}$
 containing g. Set 
 $\mathbf {W}:=\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 and
$\mathbf {W}:=\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 and 
 $\bar {\mathbf {W}}=\mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
, and let
$\bar {\mathbf {W}}=\mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
, and let 
 $\rho ^*:\mathbf {W}\to \bar {\mathbf {W}}$
 be the induced mapping of free monoids. For any subset or element X of
$\rho ^*:\mathbf {W}\to \bar {\mathbf {W}}$
 be the induced mapping of free monoids. For any subset or element X of 
 $\mathbf {W}$
, write
$\mathbf {W}$
, write 
 $\bar X$
 for the image of X under
$\bar X$
 for the image of X under 
 $\rho ^*$
. Similarly, if Y is a subset or element of
$\rho ^*$
. Similarly, if Y is a subset or element of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, write
$\mathcal {L}$
, write 
 $\bar Y$
 for the image of Y under
$\bar Y$
 for the image of Y under 
 $\rho $
. In particular,
$\rho $
. In particular, 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 denotes the image of
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 denotes the image of 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 under
$\mathbf {D}$
 under 
 $\rho ^*$
. Set
$\rho ^*$
. Set 
 $\bar {\Delta }=\{\bar P\mid P\in \Delta \}$
.
$\bar {\Delta }=\{\bar P\mid P\in \Delta \}$
.
 For 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}$
, we shall say that w is
$w\in \mathbf {W}$
, we shall say that w is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal (relative to
$\uparrow $
-maximal (relative to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
) if every entry of w is
$\mathcal {N}$
) if every entry of w is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal.
$\uparrow $
-maximal.
Lemma 3.16. There is a unique mapping 
 $\bar \Pi :\bar {\mathbf {D}}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, and a unique involutory bijection
$\bar \Pi :\bar {\mathbf {D}}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, and a unique involutory bijection 
 $\bar g\mapsto {\bar g}^{-1}$
 on
$\bar g\mapsto {\bar g}^{-1}$
 on 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 such that
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 such that 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, with these structures, is a partial group and
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, with these structures, is a partial group and 
 $\rho $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups. Moreover,
$\rho $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups. Moreover, 
 $\bar {\mathbf {1}}$
 is then the identity element of
$\bar {\mathbf {1}}$
 is then the identity element of 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, and the homomorphism of free monoids
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, and the homomorphism of free monoids 
 $\rho ^*:\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})\to \mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 maps
$\rho ^*:\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})\to \mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 maps 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 onto
$\mathbf {D}$
 onto 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
.
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
.
Proof. Let 
 $u=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)$
 and
$u=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)$
 and 
 $v=(h_1,\cdots ,h_n)$
 be members of
$v=(h_1,\cdots ,h_n)$
 be members of 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 such that
$\mathbf {D}$
 such that 
 $\bar u=\bar v$
. By Proposition 3.14(d), there exists, for each i, an
$\bar u=\bar v$
. By Proposition 3.14(d), there exists, for each i, an 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal
$\uparrow $
-maximal 
 $f_i\in \mathcal {L}$
 with
$f_i\in \mathcal {L}$
 with 
 $g_i,h_i\in \mathcal {N}f_i$
. Set
$g_i,h_i\in \mathcal {N}f_i$
. Set 
 $w=(f_1,\cdots ,f_n)$
. Then
$w=(f_1,\cdots ,f_n)$
. Then 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Proposition 3.14(e), which also shows that
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Proposition 3.14(e), which also shows that 
 $\Pi (u)$
 and
$\Pi (u)$
 and 
 $\Pi (v)$
 are elements of
$\Pi (v)$
 are elements of 
 $\mathcal {N}\Pi (w)$
. Thus
$\mathcal {N}\Pi (w)$
. Thus 
 $\bar {\Pi (u)}=\bar {\Pi (w)}=\bar {\Pi (v)}$
, and there is a well-defined mapping
$\bar {\Pi (u)}=\bar {\Pi (w)}=\bar {\Pi (v)}$
, and there is a well-defined mapping 
 $\bar \Pi :\bar {\mathbf {D}}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 given by
$\bar \Pi :\bar {\mathbf {D}}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 given by 
 $$ \begin{align} \bar\Pi(u)=\bar{\Pi(u)}\quad\text{for all } u\in\mathbf{D}. \end{align} $$
$$ \begin{align} \bar\Pi(u)=\bar{\Pi(u)}\quad\text{for all } u\in\mathbf{D}. \end{align} $$
For any subset X of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, write
$\mathcal {L}$
, write 
 $X^{-1}$
 for the set of inverses of elements of X. For any
$X^{-1}$
 for the set of inverses of elements of X. For any 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
, we then have
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
, we then have 
 $(\mathcal {N}f)^{-1}=f^{-1}\mathcal {N}^{-1}$
 by Definition 1.1(4). Here
$(\mathcal {N}f)^{-1}=f^{-1}\mathcal {N}^{-1}$
 by Definition 1.1(4). Here 
 $\mathcal {N}^{-1}=\mathcal {N}$
 as
$\mathcal {N}^{-1}=\mathcal {N}$
 as 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial group, and then
$\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial group, and then 
 $(\mathcal {N}f)^{-1}=\mathcal {N}f^{-1}$
 by Proposition 3.14(a). The inversion map
$(\mathcal {N}f)^{-1}=\mathcal {N}f^{-1}$
 by Proposition 3.14(a). The inversion map 
 $\mathcal {N}f\mapsto \mathcal {N}f^{-1}$
 is then well-defined and is an involutory bijection on
$\mathcal {N}f\mapsto \mathcal {N}f^{-1}$
 is then well-defined and is an involutory bijection on 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Set
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Set 
 $\bar {\mathbf {1}}=\mathcal {N}$
.
$\bar {\mathbf {1}}=\mathcal {N}$
.
 We now check that the axioms in Definition 1.1, for a partial group, are satisfied by the above structures. Since 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 is the image of
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 is the image of 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 under
$\mathbf {D}$
 under 
 $\rho ^*$
, we get
$\rho ^*$
, we get 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}\subseteq \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Now let
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}\subseteq \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Now let 
 $\bar w=\bar u\circ \bar v\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, let
$\bar w=\bar u\circ \bar v\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, let 
 $u,v$
 be
$u,v$
 be 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal preimages in
$\uparrow $
-maximal preimages in 
 $\mathbf {W}$
 of
$\mathbf {W}$
 of 
 $\bar u$
 and
$\bar u$
 and 
 $\bar v$
, and set
$\bar v$
, and set 
 $w=u\circ v$
. Then w is
$w=u\circ v$
. Then w is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal, so
$\uparrow $
-maximal, so 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Proposition 3.14(e). Then u and v are in
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Proposition 3.14(e). Then u and v are in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
, so
$\mathbf {D}$
, so 
 $\bar u$
 and
$\bar u$
 and 
 $\bar v$
 are in
$\bar v$
 are in 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Thus
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Thus 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 satisfies Definition 1.1(1). Clearly, (*) implies that
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 satisfies Definition 1.1(1). Clearly, (*) implies that 
 $\bar \Pi $
 restricts to the identity on
$\bar \Pi $
 restricts to the identity on 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, so
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, so 
 $\bar \Pi $
 satisfies Definition 1.1(2).
$\bar \Pi $
 satisfies Definition 1.1(2).
 Next, let 
 $\bar u\circ \bar v\circ \bar w\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, and choose corresponding
$\bar u\circ \bar v\circ \bar w\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, and choose corresponding 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal preimages
$\uparrow $
-maximal preimages 
 $u,v,w$
. Set
$u,v,w$
. Set 
 $g=\Pi (v)$
. Then
$g=\Pi (v)$
. Then 
 $\bar g=\bar \Pi (\bar v)$
 by (*). By Definition 1.1(3), we have both
$\bar g=\bar \Pi (\bar v)$
 by (*). By Definition 1.1(3), we have both 
 $u\circ v\circ w$
 and
$u\circ v\circ w$
 and 
 $u\circ (g)\circ w$
 in
$u\circ (g)\circ w$
 in 
 $\mathbf {D}$
, and these two words have the same image under
$\mathbf {D}$
, and these two words have the same image under 
 $\Pi $
. Applying
$\Pi $
. Applying 
 $\rho ^*$
, we obtain words in
$\rho ^*$
, we obtain words in 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 having the same image under
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 having the same image under 
 $\bar \Pi $
, and thus
$\bar \Pi $
, and thus 
 $\bar \Pi $
 satisfies Definition 1.1(3). By definition,
$\bar \Pi $
 satisfies Definition 1.1(3). By definition, 
 $\bar \Pi (\emptyset )=\bar {\mathbf {1}}$
, and then the condition Definition 1.1(4) is readily verified. Thus,
$\bar \Pi (\emptyset )=\bar {\mathbf {1}}$
, and then the condition Definition 1.1(4) is readily verified. Thus, 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 is a partial group.
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 is a partial group.
 By definition, 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 is the image of
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 is the image of 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 under
$\mathbf {D}$
 under 
 $\rho ^*$
. So, in order to check that
$\rho ^*$
. So, in order to check that 
 $\rho $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups, it suffices to show that if
$\rho $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups, it suffices to show that if 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, then
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
, then 
 $\bar \Pi (w\rho ^*)=\Pi (w)\rho $
. But this is simply the statement (*). Moreover, it is this observation that establishes that the given partial group structure on
$\bar \Pi (w\rho ^*)=\Pi (w)\rho $
. But this is simply the statement (*). Moreover, it is this observation that establishes that the given partial group structure on 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 is the unique one for which
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 is the unique one for which 
 $\rho $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups. We have
$\rho $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups. We have 
 $f\in Ker(\rho )$
 if and only if
$f\in Ker(\rho )$
 if and only if 
 $f\rho =\bar {\mathbf {1}}=\mathcal {N}$
. Since
$f\rho =\bar {\mathbf {1}}=\mathcal {N}$
. Since 
 $\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {N}$
 implies
$\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {N}$
 implies 
 $f\in \mathcal {N}$
, and since
$f\in \mathcal {N}$
, and since 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 is the maximal coset of
$\mathcal {N}$
 is the maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 containing
$\mathcal {L}$
 containing 
 $\mathbf {1}$
, we obtain
$\mathbf {1}$
, we obtain 
 $Ker(\rho )=\mathcal {N}$
.
$Ker(\rho )=\mathcal {N}$
.
4 Quotient localities
 We continue the setup in which 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 is a fixed locality and
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 is a fixed locality and 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 is a partial normal subgroup. We have seen in Lemma 3.16 that the set
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 is a partial normal subgroup. We have seen in Lemma 3.16 that the set 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of maximal cosets of
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of maximal cosets of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 inherits from
$\mathcal {N}$
 inherits from 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 a partial group structure via the projection map
$\mathcal {L}$
 a partial group structure via the projection map 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
. The aim now is to go further and show that
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
. The aim now is to go further and show that 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 is a locality. The argument for this involves some subtleties: the main problem lies in showing that
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 is a locality. The argument for this involves some subtleties: the main problem lies in showing that 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N})$
 contains
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N})$
 contains 
 $\mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
 (see Definition 2.1), where
$\mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
 (see Definition 2.1), where 
 $\bar {\Delta }$
 is the set of all
$\bar {\Delta }$
 is the set of all 
 $P\rho $
 with
$P\rho $
 with 
 $P\in \Delta $
. The following two lemmas are intended as steps toward addressing this point.
$P\in \Delta $
. The following two lemmas are intended as steps toward addressing this point.
Lemma 4.1. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Then
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
. Then 
 $(\mathcal {N}S,\Delta ,S)$
 is a locality.
$(\mathcal {N}S,\Delta ,S)$
 is a locality.
Proof. By Lemma 3.4, 
 $\mathcal {N}S$
 is a partial subgroup of
$\mathcal {N}S$
 is a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. One observes that
$\mathcal {L}$
. One observes that 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {N}S)$
 is the subset
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {N}S)$
 is the subset 
 $\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
 of
$\mathbf {D}_\Delta $
 of 
 $\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {N}S)$
, as defined in (Definition 2.1), and this suffices to show that
$\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {N}S)$
, as defined in (Definition 2.1), and this suffices to show that 
 $(\mathcal {N}S,\Delta )$
 is objective. As S is a maximal p-subgroup of
$(\mathcal {N}S,\Delta )$
 is objective. As S is a maximal p-subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {N}S$
, there is nothing more that needs to be shown.
$\mathcal {N}S$
, there is nothing more that needs to be shown.
Lemma 4.2. Let P be a subgroup of S, let 
 $\Gamma $
 be a nonempty set of S-conjugates of P, and set
$\Gamma $
 be a nonempty set of S-conjugates of P, and set 
 $X=\bigcup \Gamma $
. Assume that
$X=\bigcup \Gamma $
. Assume that 
 $P^x\in \Gamma $
 for all
$P^x\in \Gamma $
 for all 
 $x\in X$
. Then either
$x\in X$
. Then either 
 $\Gamma =\{P\}$
 or
$\Gamma =\{P\}$
 or 
 $N_S(P)\cap X\nsubseteq P$
.
$N_S(P)\cap X\nsubseteq P$
.
Proof. Let 
 $\S $
 be the set of overgroups Q of P in S such that
$\S $
 be the set of overgroups Q of P in S such that 
 $X\cap Q=P$
. Thus
$X\cap Q=P$
. Thus 
 $P\in \S $
. Regard
$P\in \S $
. Regard 
 $\S $
 as a poset via inclusion, and let Q be maximal in
$\S $
 as a poset via inclusion, and let Q be maximal in 
 $\S $
. If
$\S $
. If 
 $Q=S$
, then
$Q=S$
, then 
 $X=P$
 and
$X=P$
 and 
 $\Gamma =\{P\}$
. On the other hand, suppose that
$\Gamma =\{P\}$
. On the other hand, suppose that 
 $Q\neq S$
. Then Q is a proper subgroup of
$Q\neq S$
. Then Q is a proper subgroup of 
 $N_S(Q)$
, and the maximality of Q implies that there exists
$N_S(Q)$
, and the maximality of Q implies that there exists 
 $x\in N_S(Q)\cap X$
 with
$x\in N_S(Q)\cap X$
 with 
 $x\notin P$
. Since
$x\notin P$
. Since 
 $P^x\leq Q$
, and since
$P^x\leq Q$
, and since 
 $P^x\subseteq X$
 by hypothesis, we conclude that
$P^x\subseteq X$
 by hypothesis, we conclude that 
 $P^x=P$
. Thus
$P^x=P$
. Thus 
 $N_S(P)\cap X\nsubseteq P$
.
$N_S(P)\cap X\nsubseteq P$
.
Theorem 4.3. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be a partial group, and let
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be a partial group, and let 
 $\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be a homomorphism of partial groups such that the induced map
$\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be a homomorphism of partial groups such that the induced map 
 $\beta ^*:\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})\to \mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 sends
$\beta ^*:\mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})\to \mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 sends 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
 onto
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
 onto 
 $\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
. Set
$\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
. Set 
 $\mathcal {N}=Ker(\beta )$
 and
$\mathcal {N}=Ker(\beta )$
 and 
 $T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
. Further, set
$T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
. Further, set 
 $\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
,
$\mathbf {D}=\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})$
, 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}=\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
,
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}=\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
, 
 $\bar S=S\beta $
, and
$\bar S=S\beta $
, and 
 $\bar \Delta =\{P\beta \mid P\in \Delta \}$
. Then
$\bar \Delta =\{P\beta \mid P\in \Delta \}$
. Then 
 $(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 is a locality. Moreover,
$(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 is a locality. Moreover, 
- 
(a) The fibres of  $\beta $
 are the maximal cosets of $\beta $
 are the maximal cosets of $\mathcal {N}$
. $\mathcal {N}$
.
- 
(b) For each  $\bar w\in \mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
, there exists $\bar w\in \mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
, there exists $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 such that $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
 such that $\bar w=w\beta ^*$
 and each entry of w is $\bar w=w\beta ^*$
 and each entry of w is $\uparrow $
-maximal relative to the partial normal subgroup $\uparrow $
-maximal relative to the partial normal subgroup $\mathcal {N}$
 of $\mathcal {N}$
 of $\mathcal {L}$
. For any such w, we then have $\mathcal {L}$
. For any such w, we then have $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 if and only if $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 if and only if $\bar w\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. $\bar w\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
.
- 
(c) Let  $P,Q\in \Delta $
 with $P,Q\in \Delta $
 with $T\leq P\cap Q$
. Then $T\leq P\cap Q$
. Then $\beta $
 restricts to a surjection $\beta $
 restricts to a surjection $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P,Q)\to N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(P\beta ,Q\beta )$
 and a surjective homomorphism if $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P,Q)\to N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(P\beta ,Q\beta )$
 and a surjective homomorphism if $P=Q$
. $P=Q$
.
- 
(d)  $\beta $
 is an isomorphism if and only if $\beta $
 is an isomorphism if and only if $\mathcal {N}=1$
. $\mathcal {N}=1$
.
- 
(e) We have  $(S_g)\beta =\bar S_{g\beta }$
 for each $(S_g)\beta =\bar S_{g\beta }$
 for each $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that g is $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that g is $\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to $\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to $\mathcal {N}$
. $\mathcal {N}$
.
Proof. As 
 $\mathbf {D}\beta ^*=\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, it follows that
$\mathbf {D}\beta ^*=\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, it follows that 
 $\beta ^*$
 maps the set of words of length 1 in
$\beta ^*$
 maps the set of words of length 1 in 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 onto the set of words of length 1 in
$\mathcal {L}$
 onto the set of words of length 1 in 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Thus
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Thus 
 $\beta $
 is surjective.
$\beta $
 is surjective.
 For any subgroup M of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, there is a homomorphism of partial groups
$\mathcal {L}$
, there is a homomorphism of partial groups 
 $\beta _M:M\to M\beta $
 given by restriction of
$\beta _M:M\to M\beta $
 given by restriction of 
 $\beta $
, and then
$\beta $
, and then 
 $\beta _M$
 is a homomorphism of groups by Lemma 1.13. In particular, we have the homomorphism
$\beta _M$
 is a homomorphism of groups by Lemma 1.13. In particular, we have the homomorphism 
 $\beta _S:S\to \bar S$
, so
$\beta _S:S\to \bar S$
, so 
 $\bar S$
 is a p-group, and
$\bar S$
 is a p-group, and 
 $\bar \Delta $
 is a set of subgroups of
$\bar \Delta $
 is a set of subgroups of 
 $\bar S$
.
$\bar S$
.
 We have 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 by Lemma 1.14. Let
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 by Lemma 1.14. Let 
 $\Lambda $
 be the set of elements
$\Lambda $
 be the set of elements 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that g is
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that g is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal relative to
$\uparrow $
-maximal relative to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. For any
$\mathcal {N}$
. For any 
 $g\in \Lambda $
,
$g\in \Lambda $
, 
 $\beta $
 is constant on the maximal coset
$\beta $
 is constant on the maximal coset 
 $\mathcal {N}g$
 (see Proposition 3.14) of
$\mathcal {N}g$
 (see Proposition 3.14) of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
, so
$\mathcal {N}$
, so 
 $\beta $
 restricts to a surjection of
$\beta $
 restricts to a surjection of 
 $\Lambda $
 onto
$\Lambda $
 onto 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, and hence
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, and hence 
 $\beta ^*$
 restricts to a surjection of
$\beta ^*$
 restricts to a surjection of 
 $\mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
 onto
$\mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
 onto 
 $\mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
. If
$\mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
. If 
 $\bar w\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, then there exists
$\bar w\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, then there exists 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 with
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 with 
 $w\beta ^*=\bar w$
, and then Proposition 3.14(e) shows that such a w may be chosen to be in
$w\beta ^*=\bar w$
, and then Proposition 3.14(e) shows that such a w may be chosen to be in 
 $\mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
. In particular, (b) holds, and
$\mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
. In particular, (b) holds, and 
- 
(1)  $\beta ^*$
 maps $\beta ^*$
 maps $\mathbf {D}\cap \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
 onto $\mathbf {D}\cap \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
 onto $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
.
 Let 
 $\bar a\in \bar S$
, let
$\bar a\in \bar S$
, let 
 $a\in S$
 be a
$a\in S$
 be a 
 $\beta _S$
-preimage of
$\beta _S$
-preimage of 
 $\bar a$
, and let
$\bar a$
, and let 
 $h\in \mathcal {L}$
 be any
$h\in \mathcal {L}$
 be any 
 $\beta $
-preimage of
$\beta $
-preimage of 
 $\bar a$
. Then
$\bar a$
. Then 
 $(h,a^{-1},a)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$(h,a^{-1},a)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $S_h$
, and we have
$S_h$
, and we have 
 $h=(ha^{-1})a\in \mathcal {N}a$
. Thus
$h=(ha^{-1})a\in \mathcal {N}a$
. Thus 
- 
(2) The  $\beta $
-preimage of an element $\beta $
-preimage of an element $\bar a\in \bar S$
 is a maximal coset $\bar a\in \bar S$
 is a maximal coset $\mathcal {N}a$
, where $\mathcal {N}a$
, where $a\in S$
. $a\in S$
.
Fix 
 $\bar g\in \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, let
$\bar g\in \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, let 
 $g\in \Lambda $
 with
$g\in \Lambda $
 with 
 $g\beta =\bar g$
, set
$g\beta =\bar g$
, set 
 $P=S_g$
, and set
$P=S_g$
, and set 
 $$ \begin{align*}\bar S_{\bar g}=\{\bar x\in\bar S\mid \bar x^{\bar g}\in \bar S\}. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}\bar S_{\bar g}=\{\bar x\in\bar S\mid \bar x^{\bar g}\in \bar S\}. \end{align*} $$
Let 
 $\bar a\in \bar S_{\bar g}$
, set
$\bar a\in \bar S_{\bar g}$
, set 
 $\bar b=\bar g^{-1}\bar a\bar g$
, and choose
$\bar b=\bar g^{-1}\bar a\bar g$
, and choose 
 $a,b\in S$
 so that
$a,b\in S$
 so that 
 $a\beta =\bar a$
 and
$a\beta =\bar a$
 and 
 $b\beta =\bar b$
. As
$b\beta =\bar b$
. As 
 $(g^{-1},g,b)\in \mathbf {D}$
, we may apply left cancellation within
$(g^{-1},g,b)\in \mathbf {D}$
, we may apply left cancellation within 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 and obtain
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 and obtain 
 $\bar g\bar b=\bar a\bar g$
. A further, similar, left cancellation then yields
$\bar g\bar b=\bar a\bar g$
. A further, similar, left cancellation then yields 
 $\bar a^{-1}\bar g\bar b=\bar g$
. Let
$\bar a^{-1}\bar g\bar b=\bar g$
. Let 
 $x\in S_g$
, and set
$x\in S_g$
, and set 
 $v=(b^{-1},g^{-1},a,a^{-1},x,a,a^{-1},g,b)$
. Then
$v=(b^{-1},g^{-1},a,a^{-1},x,a,a^{-1},g,b)$
. Then 
 $v\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Lemma 2.8, so
$v\in \mathbf {D}$
 by Lemma 2.8, so 
 $\bar v\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Set
$\bar v\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Set 
 $\bar v'=(\bar g^{-1},\bar a^{-1},\bar x,\bar a,\bar g)$
. Then
$\bar v'=(\bar g^{-1},\bar a^{-1},\bar x,\bar a,\bar g)$
. Then 
 $\bar v'\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 and
$\bar v'\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
 and 
 $\bar \Pi (\bar v')=\bar \Pi (\bar v)$
 by
$\bar \Pi (\bar v')=\bar \Pi (\bar v)$
 by 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
-associativity. Thus
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
-associativity. Thus 
 $$ \begin{align*}(\bar x^{\bar a})^{\bar g}=\bar x^{\bar a\bar g}=\bar x^{\bar g\bar b}=(\bar x^{\bar g})^{\bar b}\in\bar S. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}(\bar x^{\bar a})^{\bar g}=\bar x^{\bar a\bar g}=\bar x^{\bar g\bar b}=(\bar x^{\bar g})^{\bar b}\in\bar S. \end{align*} $$
This shows
 $$ \begin{align} (\bar P^{\bar a})^{\bar g}=\bar P^{\bar g\bar b}\leq\bar S.  \end{align} $$
$$ \begin{align} (\bar P^{\bar a})^{\bar g}=\bar P^{\bar g\bar b}\leq\bar S.  \end{align} $$
Thus, the set 
 $\Gamma $
 of all
$\Gamma $
 of all 
 $\bar S_{\bar g}$
-conjugates of
$\bar S_{\bar g}$
-conjugates of 
 $\bar P$
 is a set of subgroups of
$\bar P$
 is a set of subgroups of 
 $\bar S$
 contained in the set
$\bar S$
 contained in the set 
 $\bar S_{\bar g}$
. Setting
$\bar S_{\bar g}$
. Setting 
 $X=\bigcup \Gamma $
, we thus have the setup of Lemma 4.2.
$X=\bigcup \Gamma $
, we thus have the setup of Lemma 4.2.
 Assume now that 
 $\bar P\neq \bar S_{\bar g}$
. Then Lemma 4.2 yields an element
$\bar P\neq \bar S_{\bar g}$
. Then Lemma 4.2 yields an element 
 $\bar x\in \bar S_{\bar g}-\bar P$
 such that
$\bar x\in \bar S_{\bar g}-\bar P$
 such that 
 $\bar x$
 normalises
$\bar x$
 normalises 
 $\bar P$
. Let Q be the
$\bar P$
. Let Q be the 
 $\beta $
-preimage of
$\beta $
-preimage of 
 $\bar P\langle \bar x\rangle $
 in S. Then
$\bar P\langle \bar x\rangle $
 in S. Then 
 $Q^g$
 is defined (and is a subgroup of
$Q^g$
 is defined (and is a subgroup of 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P^g)$
) by Lemma 2.3(b). As
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(P^g)$
) by Lemma 2.3(b). As 
 $\bar Q^{\bar g}\leq \bar S$
, we obtain
$\bar Q^{\bar g}\leq \bar S$
, we obtain 
 $Q^g\leq \mathcal {N}S$
. As
$Q^g\leq \mathcal {N}S$
. As 
 $\mathcal {N}S$
 is a locality by Lemma 4.1, it follows from Proposition 2.10(b) that there exists
$\mathcal {N}S$
 is a locality by Lemma 4.1, it follows from Proposition 2.10(b) that there exists 
 $f\in \mathcal {N}$
 with
$f\in \mathcal {N}$
 with 
 $(Q^g)^f\leq S$
. Here
$(Q^g)^f\leq S$
. Here 
 $(g,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via P, so
$(g,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via P, so 
 $Q\leq S_{gf}$
, and this contradicts the
$Q\leq S_{gf}$
, and this contradicts the 
 $\uparrow $
-maximality of g. We conclude
$\uparrow $
-maximality of g. We conclude 
- 
(3)  $(S_g)\beta =\bar S_{g\beta }$
 for each $(S_g)\beta =\bar S_{g\beta }$
 for each $g\in \Lambda $
. $g\in \Lambda $
.
Thus (e) holds.
 Next, let 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
, and define
$w\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
, and define 
 $\bar S_{\bar w}$
 to be the set of all
$\bar S_{\bar w}$
 to be the set of all 
 $\bar x\in \bar S$
 such that
$\bar x\in \bar S$
 such that 
 $\bar x$
 is conjugated successively into
$\bar x$
 is conjugated successively into 
 $\bar S$
 by the entries of
$\bar S$
 by the entries of 
 $\bar w$
. If w is not the empty word, then we may write
$\bar w$
. If w is not the empty word, then we may write 
 $w=(g)\circ u$
 for some
$w=(g)\circ u$
 for some 
 $g\in \Lambda $
 and
$g\in \Lambda $
 and 
 $u\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
, and then
$u\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
, and then 
 $S_w=\{x\in S_g\mid x^g\in S_u\}$
. Then (3) together with induction on
$S_w=\{x\in S_g\mid x^g\in S_u\}$
. Then (3) together with induction on 
 $\ell (w)$
 yields
$\ell (w)$
 yields 
 $$ \begin{align*}\bar{S_w}=\{\bar x\in\bar S_{\bar g}\mid \bar x^{\bar g}\in \bar S_{\bar u}\}=\bar S_{\bar w}. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}\bar{S_w}=\{\bar x\in\bar S_{\bar g}\mid \bar x^{\bar g}\in \bar S_{\bar u}\}=\bar S_{\bar w}. \end{align*} $$
Thus
- 
(4)  $(S_w)\beta =\bar S_{w\beta ^*}$
 for all $(S_w)\beta =\bar S_{w\beta ^*}$
 for all $w\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
. $w\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
.
 We next verify that 
 $(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta )$
 is objective. Let
$(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta )$
 is objective. Let 
 $\mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
 be the set of all
$\mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
 be the set of all 
 $\bar w\in \mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 with
$\bar w\in \mathbf {W}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 with 
 $\bar S_{\bar w}\in \bar {\Delta }$
. Let
$\bar S_{\bar w}\in \bar {\Delta }$
. Let 
 $\bar w\in \mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
, and let
$\bar w\in \mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
, and let 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
 with
$w\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
 with 
 $w\beta ^*=\bar w$
. We have
$w\beta ^*=\bar w$
. We have 
 $T\leq S_w$
 by Proposition 3.9, and
$T\leq S_w$
 by Proposition 3.9, and 
 $T=S\cap Ker(\beta )$
, so
$T=S\cap Ker(\beta )$
, so 
 $S_w$
 is the
$S_w$
 is the 
 $\beta _S$
-preimage of
$\beta _S$
-preimage of 
 $(S_w)\beta $
. Then
$(S_w)\beta $
. Then 
 $S_w\in \Delta $
, so
$S_w\in \Delta $
, so 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and then (4) yields
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
, and then (4) yields 
 $\bar w\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Thus
$\bar w\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Thus 
 $\mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}\subseteq \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. On the other hand, let
$\mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}\subseteq \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. On the other hand, let 
 $\bar v\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, and let
$\bar v\in \bar {\mathbf {D}}$
, and let 
 $v\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
 with
$v\in \mathbf {W}(\Lambda )$
 with 
 $v\beta ^*=\bar v$
. Then (b) yields
$v\beta ^*=\bar v$
. Then (b) yields 
 $v\in \mathbf {D}$
, so
$v\in \mathbf {D}$
, so 
 $S_v\in \Delta $
, and
$S_v\in \Delta $
, and 
 $\bar v\in \mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
. Thus
$\bar v\in \mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
. Thus 
 $\bar {\mathbf {D}}=\mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
, and
$\bar {\mathbf {D}}=\mathbf {D}_{\bar {\Delta }}$
, and 
 $(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta )$
 satisfies the condition (O1) in Definition 2.1 of objectivity.
$(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta )$
 satisfies the condition (O1) in Definition 2.1 of objectivity.
 Let 
 $\bar P\in \bar {\Delta }$
, and let
$\bar P\in \bar {\Delta }$
, and let 
 $\bar g\in \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 with
$\bar g\in \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 with 
 $\bar P\leq \bar S_{\bar g}$
. Choose
$\bar P\leq \bar S_{\bar g}$
. Choose 
 $g\in \Lambda $
 with
$g\in \Lambda $
 with 
 $g\beta =\bar g$
, and let P be the
$g\beta =\bar g$
, and let P be the 
 $\beta _S$
-preimage of
$\beta _S$
-preimage of 
 $\bar P$
. Then
$\bar P$
. Then 
 $P\in \Delta $
, by the definition of
$P\in \Delta $
, by the definition of 
 $\bar {\Delta }$
, and we have
$\bar {\Delta }$
, and we have 
 $P\leq S_g$
 by (3). Then
$P\leq S_g$
 by (3). Then 
 $P^g\in \Delta $
, so
$P^g\in \Delta $
, so 
 $\bar P^{\bar g}\in \bar {\Delta }$
. All overgroups of
$\bar P^{\bar g}\in \bar {\Delta }$
. All overgroups of 
 $\bar P$
 in
$\bar P$
 in 
 $\bar S$
 are in
$\bar S$
 are in 
 $\bar {\Delta }$
 via the analogous property for P and S, so we have verified the condition (O2) in Definition 2.1. Thus
$\bar {\Delta }$
 via the analogous property for P and S, so we have verified the condition (O2) in Definition 2.1. Thus 
 $(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta )$
 is objective.
$(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta )$
 is objective.
 To prove (c): Let 
 $P,Q\in \Delta $
 with
$P,Q\in \Delta $
 with 
 $T\leq P\cap Q$
, set
$T\leq P\cap Q$
, set 
 $\bar P=P\beta $
 and
$\bar P=P\beta $
 and 
 $\bar Q=Q\beta $
, and let
$\bar Q=Q\beta $
, and let 
 $\bar g\in \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 such that
$\bar g\in \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 such that 
 $\bar P^{\bar g}$
 is defined and is a subset of
$\bar P^{\bar g}$
 is defined and is a subset of 
 $\bar Q$
. Let
$\bar Q$
. Let 
 $g\in \Lambda $
 be a preimage of
$g\in \Lambda $
 be a preimage of 
 $\bar g$
. Then
$\bar g$
. Then 
 $P\leq S_g$
 by (4). As
$P\leq S_g$
 by (4). As 
 $\beta _S$
 is a homomorphism,
$\beta _S$
 is a homomorphism, 
 $(P^g)\beta =\bar P^{\bar g}$
 is a subgroup of
$(P^g)\beta =\bar P^{\bar g}$
 is a subgroup of 
 $\bar Q$
. Then
$\bar Q$
. Then 
 $P^g\leq Q$
 since
$P^g\leq Q$
 since 
 $T=Ker(\beta _S)\leq P$
. That is, we have
$T=Ker(\beta _S)\leq P$
. That is, we have 
 $g\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(P,Q)$
, and thus
$g\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(P,Q)$
, and thus 
 $\beta $
 restricts to a surjection
$\beta $
 restricts to a surjection 
 $\beta _{P,Q}:N_{\mathcal {L}}(P,Q)\to N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(\bar P,\bar Q)$
. If
$\beta _{P,Q}:N_{\mathcal {L}}(P,Q)\to N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(\bar P,\bar Q)$
. If 
 $P=Q$
, then
$P=Q$
, then 
 $\beta _{P,Q}$
 is the homomorphism
$\beta _{P,Q}$
 is the homomorphism 
 $\beta _P$
, so we have (c). Moreover, in the special case that
$\beta _P$
, so we have (c). Moreover, in the special case that 
 $P=Q=S$
, we obtain in this way an epimorphism of
$P=Q=S$
, we obtain in this way an epimorphism of 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
 onto
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
 onto 
 $N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(\bar S)$
. As S is a Sylow subgroup of
$N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(\bar S)$
. As S is a Sylow subgroup of 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
, it follows that
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
, it follows that 
 $\bar S$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of
$\bar S$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(\bar S)$
, whence
$N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(\bar S)$
, whence 
 $\bar S$
 is a maximal p-subgroup of
$\bar S$
 is a maximal p-subgroup of 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Thus
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Thus 
 $(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 is a locality.
$(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 is a locality.
 To prove (a): Let 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
, and let 
 $h\in \Lambda $
 with
$h\in \Lambda $
 with 
 $f\beta =h\beta $
. By Proposition 3.14, there exists
$f\beta =h\beta $
. By Proposition 3.14, there exists 
 $g\in \Lambda $
 with
$g\in \Lambda $
 with 
 $f\in \mathcal {N}g$
, and then
$f\in \mathcal {N}g$
, and then 
 $f\beta =g\beta $
. Then
$f\beta =g\beta $
. Then 
 $S_g=S_h$
 by (3), so
$S_g=S_h$
 by (3), so 
 $(g,h^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
, and
$(g,h^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
, and 
 $(gh^{-1})\beta =\bar {\mathbf {1}}$
. Thus
$(gh^{-1})\beta =\bar {\mathbf {1}}$
. Thus 
 $gh^{-1}\in \mathcal {N}$
. As
$gh^{-1}\in \mathcal {N}$
. As 
 $(g,h^{-1},h)\in \mathbf {D}$
, we obtain
$(g,h^{-1},h)\in \mathbf {D}$
, we obtain 
 $g\in \mathcal {N}h$
. Then
$g\in \mathcal {N}h$
. Then 
 $\mathcal {N}g=\mathcal {N}h$
 by Proposition 3.14(d), and thus
$\mathcal {N}g=\mathcal {N}h$
 by Proposition 3.14(d), and thus 
 $f\in \mathcal {N}h$
. This yields (a), and it remains only to prove (d).
$f\in \mathcal {N}h$
. This yields (a), and it remains only to prove (d).
 If 
 $\beta $
 is an isomorphism, then
$\beta $
 is an isomorphism, then 
 $\beta $
 is injective, and
$\beta $
 is injective, and 
 $\mathcal {N}=\mathbf {1}$
. On the other hand, suppose that
$\mathcal {N}=\mathbf {1}$
. On the other hand, suppose that 
 $\mathcal {N}=\mathbf {1}$
. Then (a) shows that
$\mathcal {N}=\mathbf {1}$
. Then (a) shows that 
 $\beta $
 is injective, so
$\beta $
 is injective, so 
 $\beta $
 is a bijection, and
$\beta $
 is a bijection, and 
 $\mathbf {D}=\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Set
$\mathbf {D}=\bar {\mathbf {D}}$
. Set 
 $\gamma =\beta ^{-1}$
, and let
$\gamma =\beta ^{-1}$
, and let 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
. Then 
 $w\gamma ^*\in \mathbf {D}$
 as
$w\gamma ^*\in \mathbf {D}$
 as 
 $\beta ^*$
 is a bijection with inverse
$\beta ^*$
 is a bijection with inverse 
 $\gamma ^*$
. We have
$\gamma ^*$
. We have 
 $\Pi (w\gamma ^*)\beta =\Pi (w)$
 since
$\Pi (w\gamma ^*)\beta =\Pi (w)$
 since 
 $\beta $
 is a homomorphism, and thus
$\beta $
 is a homomorphism, and thus 
 $\Pi (w\gamma ^*)=(\Pi (w))\gamma $
. This shows that
$\Pi (w\gamma ^*)=(\Pi (w))\gamma $
. This shows that 
 $\gamma $
 is a homomorphism, so (d) holds, and the proof is complete.
$\gamma $
 is a homomorphism, so (d) holds, and the proof is complete.
Definition 4.4. Let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 and
$\mathcal {L}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {L}'$
 be partial groups, and let
$\mathcal {L}'$
 be partial groups, and let 
 $\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a homomorphism. Then
$\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a homomorphism. Then 
 $\beta $
 is a projection if
$\beta $
 is a projection if 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})\beta ^*=\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}')$
.
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L})\beta ^*=\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}')$
.
Corollary 4.5. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be a partial normal subgroup, and let
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be a partial normal subgroup, and let 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 be the mapping that sends
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 be the mapping that sends 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 to the unique maximal coset of
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 to the unique maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 containing g. Set
$\mathcal {N}$
 containing g. Set 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}=\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
, set
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}=\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
, set 
 $\bar S=S\rho $
, and let
$\bar S=S\rho $
, and let 
 $\bar \Delta $
 be the set of images under
$\bar \Delta $
 be the set of images under 
 $\rho $
 of the members of
$\rho $
 of the members of 
 $\Delta $
. Regard
$\Delta $
. Regard 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 as a partial group in the unique way (given by Lemma 3.16) that makes
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 as a partial group in the unique way (given by Lemma 3.16) that makes 
 $\rho $
 into a homomorphism of partial groups. Then
$\rho $
 into a homomorphism of partial groups. Then 
 $(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 is a locality, and
$(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 is a locality, and 
 $\rho $
 is a projection.
$\rho $
 is a projection.
Theorem 4.6 ‘First isomorphism theorem’
 Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 and
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 and 
 $(\mathcal {L}',\Delta ',S')$
 be localities, let
$(\mathcal {L}',\Delta ',S')$
 be localities, let 
 $\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a projection, and let
$\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 be a projection, and let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be a partial normal subgroup of
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be a partial normal subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 contained in
$\mathcal {L}$
 contained in 
 $Ker(\beta )$
. Let
$Ker(\beta )$
. Let 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 be the projection given by Corollary 4.5. Then there exists a unique homomorphism
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 be the projection given by Corollary 4.5. Then there exists a unique homomorphism 
 $$ \begin{align*}\gamma:\mathcal{L}/\mathcal{N}\to\mathcal{L}' \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}\gamma:\mathcal{L}/\mathcal{N}\to\mathcal{L}' \end{align*} $$
such that 
 $\rho \circ \gamma =\beta $
, and then
$\rho \circ \gamma =\beta $
, and then 
 $\gamma $
 is a projection. Moreover, we have
$\gamma $
 is a projection. Moreover, we have 
 $Ker(\gamma )=Ker(\beta )/\mathcal {N}$
, and
$Ker(\gamma )=Ker(\beta )/\mathcal {N}$
, and 
 $\gamma $
 is an isomorphism if and only if
$\gamma $
 is an isomorphism if and only if 
 $\mathcal {N}=Ker(\beta )$
.
$\mathcal {N}=Ker(\beta )$
.
Proof. Let 
 $\Lambda (\mathcal {N})$
 be the set of all
$\Lambda (\mathcal {N})$
 be the set of all 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that f is
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
 such that f is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal relative to
$\uparrow $
-maximal relative to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. Set
$\mathcal {N}$
. Set 
 $\mathcal {M}=Ker(\beta )$
, and similarly define
$\mathcal {M}=Ker(\beta )$
, and similarly define 
 $\Lambda (\mathcal {M})$
. By Proposition 3.14(c), the maximal cosets of
$\Lambda (\mathcal {M})$
. By Proposition 3.14(c), the maximal cosets of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 in
$\mathcal {N}$
 in 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 are the sets
$\mathcal {L}$
 are the sets 
 $\mathcal {N}f$
 with
$\mathcal {N}f$
 with 
 $f\in \Lambda (\mathcal {N})$
, and similarly for the maximal cosets of
$f\in \Lambda (\mathcal {N})$
, and similarly for the maximal cosets of 
 $\mathcal {M}$
. For any
$\mathcal {M}$
. For any 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, we have
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
, we have 
 $\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {M}g$
 as
$\mathcal {N}g\subseteq \mathcal {M}g$
 as 
 $\mathcal {N}\leq \mathcal {M}$
, so each maximal coset of
$\mathcal {N}\leq \mathcal {M}$
, so each maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 is contained in a maximal coset of
$\mathcal {N}$
 is contained in a maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {M}$
. Since the maximal cosets of
$\mathcal {M}$
. Since the maximal cosets of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 form the partition
$\mathcal {N}$
 form the partition 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, it follows that each maximal coset of
$\mathcal {L}$
, it follows that each maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {M}$
 is a union of maximal cosets of
$\mathcal {M}$
 is a union of maximal cosets of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. That is,
$\mathcal {N}$
. That is, 
- 
(*) The partition  $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 of $\mathcal {L}$
 is a refinement of the partition $\mathcal {L}$
 is a refinement of the partition $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {M}$
. $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {M}$
.
By Theorem 4.3(a), 
 $\beta $
 induces a bijection
$\beta $
 induces a bijection 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {M}\to \mathcal {L}'$
. Set
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {M}\to \mathcal {L}'$
. Set 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}=\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
. Then (*) yields a mapping
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}=\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
. Then (*) yields a mapping 
 $\gamma :\bar {\mathcal {L}}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 that sends the maximal coset
$\gamma :\bar {\mathcal {L}}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 that sends the maximal coset 
 $\mathcal {N}f$
 to
$\mathcal {N}f$
 to 
 $f\beta $
. Clearly,
$f\beta $
. Clearly, 
 $\gamma $
 is the unique mapping
$\gamma $
 is the unique mapping 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 such that
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}\to \mathcal {L}'$
 such that 
 $\rho \circ \gamma =\beta $
.
$\rho \circ \gamma =\beta $
.
 Let 
 $\bar w\in \mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
. Then Theorem 4.3(b) yields a word
$\bar w\in \mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
. Then Theorem 4.3(b) yields a word 
 $w\in \mathbf {D}$
 such that
$w\in \mathbf {D}$
 such that 
 $w\rho ^*=\bar w$
 and the entries of w are
$w\rho ^*=\bar w$
 and the entries of w are 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal relative to
$\uparrow $
-maximal relative to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. We have
$\mathcal {N}$
. We have 
 $\bar w\gamma ^*=w\beta ^*$
, so
$\bar w\gamma ^*=w\beta ^*$
, so 
 $\gamma ^*$
 maps
$\gamma ^*$
 maps 
 $\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 into
$\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 into 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}')$
. Let
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}')$
. Let 
 $\Pi '$
 and
$\Pi '$
 and 
 $\bar \Pi $
 be the products in
$\bar \Pi $
 be the products in 
 $\mathcal {L}'$
 and
$\mathcal {L}'$
 and 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, respectively. As
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, respectively. As 
 $\beta $
 and
$\beta $
 and 
 $\rho $
 are homomorphisms, we get
$\rho $
 are homomorphisms, we get 
 $$ \begin{align*}\Pi'(\bar w\gamma^*)=\Pi'(w\beta^*)=(\Pi(w))\beta=(\bar{\Pi(w)})\gamma=(\bar\Pi(\bar w))\gamma, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}\Pi'(\bar w\gamma^*)=\Pi'(w\beta^*)=(\Pi(w))\beta=(\bar{\Pi(w)})\gamma=(\bar\Pi(\bar w))\gamma, \end{align*} $$
and thus 
 $\gamma $
 is a homomorphism. As
$\gamma $
 is a homomorphism. As 
 $\beta =\rho \circ \gamma $
 is a projection, and since
$\beta =\rho \circ \gamma $
 is a projection, and since 
 $\beta ^*=\rho ^*\circ \gamma ^*$
,
$\beta ^*=\rho ^*\circ \gamma ^*$
, 
 $\gamma ^*$
 maps
$\gamma ^*$
 maps 
 $\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 onto
$\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
 onto 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}')$
. That is,
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}')$
. That is, 
 $\gamma $
 is a projection.
$\gamma $
 is a projection.
 Clearly 
 $\mathcal {M}/\mathcal {N}\leq Ker(\gamma )$
. On the other hand, if
$\mathcal {M}/\mathcal {N}\leq Ker(\gamma )$
. On the other hand, if 
 $\mathcal {N}f$
 is a maximal coset of
$\mathcal {N}f$
 is a maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 with
$\mathcal {N}$
 with 
 $\mathcal {N}f\in Ker(\gamma )$
, then
$\mathcal {N}f\in Ker(\gamma )$
, then 
 $f\in Ker(\beta )$
, so
$f\in Ker(\beta )$
, so 
 $\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {M}$
, and
$\mathcal {N}f\subseteq \mathcal {M}$
, and 
 $\mathcal {N}f\in \mathcal {M}/\mathcal {N}$
. Thus
$\mathcal {N}f\in \mathcal {M}/\mathcal {N}$
. Thus 
 $Ker(\gamma )=\mathcal {M}/\mathcal {N}$
. We have
$Ker(\gamma )=\mathcal {M}/\mathcal {N}$
. We have 
 $\mathcal {M}=\mathcal {N}$
 if and only if
$\mathcal {M}=\mathcal {N}$
 if and only if 
 $Ker(\gamma )=\mathbf {1}$
. Then Theorem 4.3(d) shows that
$Ker(\gamma )=\mathbf {1}$
. Then Theorem 4.3(d) shows that 
 $\gamma $
 is an isomorphism if and only if
$\gamma $
 is an isomorphism if and only if 
 $\mathcal {M}=\mathcal {N}$
; completing the proof.
$\mathcal {M}=\mathcal {N}$
; completing the proof.
Proposition 4.7 Partial subgroup correspondence
 Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 and
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 and 
 $(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 be localities, and let
$(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 be localities, and let 
 $\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be a projection. Set
$\beta :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be a projection. Set 
 $\mathcal {N}=Ker(\beta )$
, and set
$\mathcal {N}=Ker(\beta )$
, and set 
 $T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
. Then
$T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
. Then 
 $\beta $
 induces a bijection
$\beta $
 induces a bijection 
 $\sigma $
 from the set
$\sigma $
 from the set 
 $\mathfrak {H}$
 of partial subgroups
$\mathfrak {H}$
 of partial subgroups 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 of
$\mathcal {H}$
 of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 containing
$\mathcal {L}$
 containing 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 to the set
$\mathcal {N}$
 to the set 
 $\bar {\mathfrak {H}}$
 of partial subgroups
$\bar {\mathfrak {H}}$
 of partial subgroups 
 $\bar {\mathcal {H}}$
 of
$\bar {\mathcal {H}}$
 of 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Moreover, for any
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Moreover, for any 
 $\mathcal {H}\in \mathfrak {H}$
, we have
$\mathcal {H}\in \mathfrak {H}$
, we have 
 $\mathcal {H}\beta \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}'$
 if and only if
$\mathcal {H}\beta \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}'$
 if and only if 
 $\mathcal {H}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {H}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
Proof. Any partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 containing
$\mathcal {L}$
 containing 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 is a union of maximal cosets of
$\mathcal {N}$
 is a union of maximal cosets of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 by Lemma 3.15. Then Theorem 4.3(a) enables the same argument that one has for groups, for proving that
$\mathcal {N}$
 by Lemma 3.15. Then Theorem 4.3(a) enables the same argument that one has for groups, for proving that 
 $\rho $
 induces a bijection
$\rho $
 induces a bijection 
 $\mathfrak {H}\to \bar {\mathfrak {H}}$
. Since each maximal coset of
$\mathfrak {H}\to \bar {\mathfrak {H}}$
. Since each maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 contains an element that is
$\mathcal {N}$
 contains an element that is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to
$\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
, one may apply Theorem 4.3(b) to show that a partial subgroup
$\mathcal {N}$
, one may apply Theorem 4.3(b) to show that a partial subgroup 
 $\mathcal {H}\in \mathfrak {H}$
 is normal in
$\mathcal {H}\in \mathfrak {H}$
 is normal in 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 if and only if its image is normal in
$\mathcal {L}$
 if and only if its image is normal in 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. The reader should have no difficulty with the details of the argument.
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. The reader should have no difficulty with the details of the argument.
Remark 4.8. One may ask whether the ‘other two’ isomorphism theorems hold, in any sense, for localities. Let us formulate these for groups, rather than localities, as follows.
- 
(1) Let G be a group, let  $N\trianglelefteq G$
 be a normal subgroup, and let $N\trianglelefteq G$
 be a normal subgroup, and let $H\leq G$
 be an arbitrary subgroup. Then the quotient map $H\leq G$
 be an arbitrary subgroup. Then the quotient map $G\to G/N$
 restricts to an epimorphism $G\to G/N$
 restricts to an epimorphism $H\to HN/N$
 with kernel $H\to HN/N$
 with kernel $H\cap N$
. $H\cap N$
.
- 
(2) Let G be a group, let  $N\trianglelefteq G$
 be a normal subgroup, and let $N\trianglelefteq G$
 be a normal subgroup, and let $K\trianglelefteq G$
 with $K\trianglelefteq G$
 with $N\leq K$
. Then the quotient map $N\leq K$
. Then the quotient map $G\to G/K$
 factors through an epimorphism $G\to G/K$
 factors through an epimorphism $G/N\to G/K$
 with kernel $G/N\to G/K$
 with kernel $N/K$
. $N/K$
.
A comprehensive version of (1) for localities appears to be out of reach for two reasons. First, given a partial subgroup 
 $\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
 and a partial normal subgroup
$\mathcal {H}\leq \mathcal {L}$
 and a partial normal subgroup 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, there appears to be no reason for the image of
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, there appears to be no reason for the image of 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 under the projection
$\mathcal {H}$
 under the projection 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 to be a partial subgroup of
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 to be a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
, other than in special cases. Second, there seems to be no way, in general, to define the quotient of
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
, other than in special cases. Second, there seems to be no way, in general, to define the quotient of 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 over the partial normal subgroup
$\mathcal {H}$
 over the partial normal subgroup 
 $\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {N}$
 of
$\mathcal {H}\cap \mathcal {N}$
 of 
 $\mathcal {H}$
.
$\mathcal {H}$
.
 On the other hand, one does indeed have the analogue of (2) for localities. Namely, let 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 be a locality, and let
$\mathcal {L}$
 be a locality, and let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 and
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be partial normal subgroups with
$\mathcal {K}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be partial normal subgroups with 
 $\mathcal {N}\leq \mathcal {K}$
. Then the projection
$\mathcal {N}\leq \mathcal {K}$
. Then the projection 
 $\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {K}$
 factors through the projection
$\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {K}$
 factors through the projection 
 $\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 by Theorem 4.6, yielding a projection
$\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 by Theorem 4.6, yielding a projection 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {K}$
 with kernel
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {K}$
 with kernel 
 $\mathcal {N}/\mathcal {K}$
. (We shall not need this result, and we leave the details to the reader.)
$\mathcal {N}/\mathcal {K}$
. (We shall not need this result, and we leave the details to the reader.)
Lemma 4.9. Let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and let
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and let 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 be the canonical projection. Further, let
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 be the canonical projection. Further, let 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 be a partial subgroup of
$\mathcal {H}$
 be a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 containing
$\mathcal {L}$
 containing 
 $\mathcal {N}$
, and let X be an arbitrary subset of
$\mathcal {N}$
, and let X be an arbitrary subset of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Then
$\mathcal {L}$
. Then 
 $(X\cap \mathcal {H})\rho =X\rho \cap \mathcal {H}\rho $
.
$(X\cap \mathcal {H})\rho =X\rho \cap \mathcal {H}\rho $
.
Proof. By Lemma 3.15, 
 $\mathcal {H}$
 is a union of maximal cosets of
$\mathcal {H}$
 is a union of maximal cosets of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
, and then
$\mathcal {N}$
, and then 
 $\mathcal {H}\rho $
 is the set of those maximal cosets. On the other hand
$\mathcal {H}\rho $
 is the set of those maximal cosets. On the other hand 
 $X\rho $
 is the set of all maximal cosets
$X\rho $
 is the set of all maximal cosets 
 $\mathcal {N}g$
 of
$\mathcal {N}g$
 of 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 such that
$\mathcal {N}$
 such that 
 $X\cap \mathcal {N}g\neq \emptyset $
. Thus
$X\cap \mathcal {N}g\neq \emptyset $
. Thus 
 $X\rho \cap \mathcal {H}\rho \subseteq (X\cap \mathcal {H})\rho $
. The reverse inclusion is obvious.
$X\rho \cap \mathcal {H}\rho \subseteq (X\cap \mathcal {H})\rho $
. The reverse inclusion is obvious.
Corollary 4.10. Let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and let
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and let 
 $\mathcal {M}$
 be a partial normal subgroup of
$\mathcal {M}$
 be a partial normal subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 containing
$\mathcal {L}$
 containing 
 $\mathcal {N}$
. Let
$\mathcal {N}$
. Let 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 be the canonical projection. Then
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
 be the canonical projection. Then 
 $(S\cap \mathcal {M})\rho $
 is a maximal p-subgroup of
$(S\cap \mathcal {M})\rho $
 is a maximal p-subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {M}\rho $
.
$\mathcal {M}\rho $
.
Proof. Write 
 $(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 for the quotient locality given by Corollary 4.5, and set
$(\bar {\mathcal {L}},\bar \Delta ,\bar S)$
 for the quotient locality given by Corollary 4.5, and set 
 $\bar {\mathcal {M}}=\mathcal {M}\rho $
. Applying Lemma 4.9 with S in the role of X, we obtain
$\bar {\mathcal {M}}=\mathcal {M}\rho $
. Applying Lemma 4.9 with S in the role of X, we obtain 
 $(S\cap \mathcal {M})\rho =\bar S\cap \bar {\mathcal {M}}$
. Since
$(S\cap \mathcal {M})\rho =\bar S\cap \bar {\mathcal {M}}$
. Since 
 $\bar {\mathcal {M}}\trianglelefteq \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, it follows from Proposition 2.10(c) that
$\bar {\mathcal {M}}\trianglelefteq \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, it follows from Proposition 2.10(c) that 
 $\bar S\cap \bar {\mathcal {M}}$
 is maximal in the poset of p-subgroups of
$\bar S\cap \bar {\mathcal {M}}$
 is maximal in the poset of p-subgroups of 
 $\bar {\mathcal {M}}$
, completing the proof.
$\bar {\mathcal {M}}$
, completing the proof.
Proposition 4.11. Let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, set
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, set 
 $T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
, and set
$T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
, and set 
 $\mathcal {L}_T=N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
. Set
$\mathcal {L}_T=N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
. Set 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}=\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
, and let
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}=\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
, and let 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be the canonical projection. Then the partial subgroup
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be the canonical projection. Then the partial subgroup 
 $\mathcal {L}_T$
 of
$\mathcal {L}_T$
 of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is a locality
$\mathcal {L}$
 is a locality 
 $(\mathcal {L}_T,\Delta ,S)$
, and the restriction of
$(\mathcal {L}_T,\Delta ,S)$
, and the restriction of 
 $\rho $
 to
$\rho $
 to 
 $\mathcal {L}_T$
 is a projection
$\mathcal {L}_T$
 is a projection 
 $\mathcal {L}_T\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
.
$\mathcal {L}_T\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
.
Proof. That 
 $\mathcal {L}_T$
 is a partial subgroup of
$\mathcal {L}_T$
 is a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 having the structure of a locality
$\mathcal {L}$
 having the structure of a locality 
 $(\mathcal {L}_T,\Delta ,S)$
 is given by Lemma 2.12. Let
$(\mathcal {L}_T,\Delta ,S)$
 is given by Lemma 2.12. Let 
 $\rho _T$
 be the restriction of
$\rho _T$
 be the restriction of 
 $\rho $
 to
$\rho $
 to 
 $\mathcal {L}_T$
. Then
$\mathcal {L}_T$
. Then 
 $\rho _T$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups, and Theorem 4.3(b) shows that
$\rho _T$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups, and Theorem 4.3(b) shows that 
 $\rho _T$
 maps
$\rho _T$
 maps 
 $\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_T)$
 onto
$\mathbf {D}(\mathcal {L}_T)$
 onto 
 $\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
. That is,
$\mathbf {D}(\bar {\mathcal {L}})$
. That is, 
 $\rho _T$
 is a projection.
$\rho _T$
 is a projection.
 We end this section with an application. For G a finite group, 
 $O_{p'}(G)$
 denotes the largest normal subgroup of G having order prime to p, and
$O_{p'}(G)$
 denotes the largest normal subgroup of G having order prime to p, and 
 $O^p(G)$
 is the smallest normal subgroup K of G such that
$O^p(G)$
 is the smallest normal subgroup K of G such that 
 $G/K$
 is a p-group. Recall that, by definition, G is of characteristic p if
$G/K$
 is a p-group. Recall that, by definition, G is of characteristic p if 
 $C_G(O_p(G))\leq O_p(G)$
. We assume that the reader is familiar with the definition of a fusion system over a finite p-group. For
$C_G(O_p(G))\leq O_p(G)$
. We assume that the reader is familiar with the definition of a fusion system over a finite p-group. For 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 a locality one has the fusion system
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 a locality one has the fusion system 
 $\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L})$
 on S, whose isomorphisms are the conjugation maps
$\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L})$
 on S, whose isomorphisms are the conjugation maps 
 $c_w$
 (for
$c_w$
 (for 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
) that were introduced following Definition 2.15.
$w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {L})$
) that were introduced following Definition 2.15.
Proposition 4.12. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality. For each
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality. For each 
 $P\in \Delta $
 set
$P\in \Delta $
 set 
 $\Theta (P)=O_{p'}(N_{\mathcal {L}}(P))$
, and set
$\Theta (P)=O_{p'}(N_{\mathcal {L}}(P))$
, and set 
 $\Theta =\bigcup \{\Theta (P)\}_{P\in \Delta }$
. Assume
$\Theta =\bigcup \{\Theta (P)\}_{P\in \Delta }$
. Assume 
- 
(*)  $P\in \Delta \implies C_S(P)\leq P$
. $P\in \Delta \implies C_S(P)\leq P$
.
Then 
 $\Theta \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
,
$\Theta \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, 
 $S\cap \Theta =1$
, and the canonical projection
$S\cap \Theta =1$
, and the canonical projection 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\Theta $
 restricts to an isomorphism
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \mathcal {L}/\Theta $
 restricts to an isomorphism 
 $S\to S\rho $
. Moreover, upon identifying S with
$S\to S\rho $
. Moreover, upon identifying S with 
 $S\rho $
,
$S\rho $
, 
- 
(a)  $(\mathcal {L}/\Theta ,\Delta ,S)$
 is a locality. $(\mathcal {L}/\Theta ,\Delta ,S)$
 is a locality.
- 
(b)  $\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L}/\Theta )=\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L})$
. $\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L}/\Theta )=\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L})$
.
- 
(c) For each  $P\in \Delta $
, the restriction of $P\in \Delta $
, the restriction of $$ \begin{align*}\rho_P:N_{\mathcal{L}}(P)\to N_{\mathcal{L}/\Theta}(P) \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*}\rho_P:N_{\mathcal{L}}(P)\to N_{\mathcal{L}/\Theta}(P) \end{align*} $$ $\rho $
 induces an isomorphism and $\rho $
 induces an isomorphism and $$ \begin{align*}N_{\mathcal{L}/\Theta}(P)\cong N_{\mathcal{L}}(P)/\Theta(P), \end{align*} $$ $$ \begin{align*}N_{\mathcal{L}/\Theta}(P)\cong N_{\mathcal{L}}(P)/\Theta(P), \end{align*} $$ $N_{\mathcal {L}/\Theta }(P)$
 is of characteristic p. $N_{\mathcal {L}/\Theta }(P)$
 is of characteristic p.
Proof. We first show
- 
(1) For each  $P\in \Delta $
, we have $P\in \Delta $
, we have $C_{\mathcal {L}}(P)=Z(P)\times \Theta (P)$
. $C_{\mathcal {L}}(P)=Z(P)\times \Theta (P)$
.
Indeed, let 
 $P\in \Delta $
. By Lemma 2.9, there exists
$P\in \Delta $
. By Lemma 2.9, there exists 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 with
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 with 
 $P\leq S_g$
 and such that
$P\leq S_g$
 and such that 
 $N_S(P^g)$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of
$N_S(P^g)$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $P^g$
. Set
$P^g$
. Set 
 $Q=P^g$
. Then
$Q=P^g$
. Then 
 $Q\in \Delta $
, so
$Q\in \Delta $
, so 
 $C_S(Q)\leq Q$
, and then
$C_S(Q)\leq Q$
, and then 
 $Z(Q)$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of
$Z(Q)$
 is a Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $C_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
. Burnside’s theorem on normal p-complement’s (39.1 in [Reference AschbacherAsch], or 7.2.1 in [Reference Kurzweil and StellmacherKS]) then yields
$C_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
. Burnside’s theorem on normal p-complement’s (39.1 in [Reference AschbacherAsch], or 7.2.1 in [Reference Kurzweil and StellmacherKS]) then yields 
 $C_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)=Z(Q)\times \Theta (Q)$
, and then (1) follows from Lemma 2.3(b).
$C_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)=Z(Q)\times \Theta (Q)$
, and then (1) follows from Lemma 2.3(b).
 Next, let 
 $x\in \Theta $
. Then there exists
$x\in \Theta $
. Then there exists 
 $Q\in \Delta $
 with
$Q\in \Delta $
 with 
 $x\in \Theta (Q)$
. Choose such a Q so that
$x\in \Theta (Q)$
. Choose such a Q so that 
 $|Q|$
 is as large as possible, and set
$|Q|$
 is as large as possible, and set 
 $R=N_{S_x}(Q)$
. Then
$R=N_{S_x}(Q)$
. Then 
 $[R,x]\leq RR^x\leq S$
. But also
$[R,x]\leq RR^x\leq S$
. But also 
 $$ \begin{align*}[R,x]\leq [N_{\mathcal{L}}(Q),\Theta(Q)]\leq\Theta(Q), \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}[R,x]\leq [N_{\mathcal{L}}(Q),\Theta(Q)]\leq\Theta(Q), \end{align*} $$
so 
 $[R,x]=1$
, and then
$[R,x]=1$
, and then 
 $x\in \Theta (R)$
 by (1). The maximality of
$x\in \Theta (R)$
 by (1). The maximality of 
 $|Q|$
 then yields
$|Q|$
 then yields 
 $Q=R$
. Thus
$Q=R$
. Thus 
 $Q=S_x$
, and we have thus shown that
$Q=S_x$
, and we have thus shown that 
 $x\in \Theta (S_x)$
. Let
$x\in \Theta (S_x)$
. Let 
 $P\in \Delta $
 with
$P\in \Delta $
 with 
 $P\leq S_x$
. Then x is a
$P\leq S_x$
. Then x is a 
 $p'$
-element of
$p'$
-element of 
 $C_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
, so (1) yields
$C_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
, so (1) yields 
 $x\in \Theta (P)$
. Thus
$x\in \Theta (P)$
. Thus 
- 
(2) Let  $x\in \Theta $
, and let $x\in \Theta $
, and let $P\in \Delta $
 with $P\in \Delta $
 with $P\leq S_x$
. Then $P\leq S_x$
. Then $x\in \Theta (P)$
. $x\in \Theta (P)$
.
 Clearly, 
 $\mathbf {1}\in \Theta $
, and
$\mathbf {1}\in \Theta $
, and 
 $\Theta $
 is closed under inversion. Let
$\Theta $
 is closed under inversion. Let 
 $$ \begin{align*}w=(x_1,\cdots,x_n)\in\mathbf{W}(\Theta)\cap\mathbf{D}, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}w=(x_1,\cdots,x_n)\in\mathbf{W}(\Theta)\cap\mathbf{D}, \end{align*} $$
and set 
 $P=S_w$
. By (2), and by induction on n, we obtain
$P=S_w$
. By (2), and by induction on n, we obtain 
 $x_i\in \Theta (P)$
 for all i, and hence
$x_i\in \Theta (P)$
 for all i, and hence 
 $\Pi (w)\in \Theta (P)$
. Thus
$\Pi (w)\in \Theta (P)$
. Thus 
 $\Theta $
 is a partial subgroup of
$\Theta $
 is a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Now let
$\mathcal {L}$
. Now let 
 $x\in \Theta $
, and let
$x\in \Theta $
, and let 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
 be given such that
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
 be given such that 
 $(g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via some
$(g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via some 
 $Q\in \Delta $
. Then
$Q\in \Delta $
. Then 
 $Q^{g^{-1}}\leq S_x$
, so (2) yields
$Q^{g^{-1}}\leq S_x$
, so (2) yields 
 $x\in \Theta (Q^{g^{-1}})$
, and then
$x\in \Theta (Q^{g^{-1}})$
, and then 
 $x^g\in \Theta (Q)$
 by Lemma 2.3(b). This completes the proof that
$x^g\in \Theta (Q)$
 by Lemma 2.3(b). This completes the proof that 
 $\Theta \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
$\Theta \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
 Set 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}=\mathcal {L}/\Theta $
 and adopt the usual ‘bar’-convention for images of elements, subgroups and collections of subgroups under the quotient map
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}=\mathcal {L}/\Theta $
 and adopt the usual ‘bar’-convention for images of elements, subgroups and collections of subgroups under the quotient map 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Since
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
. Since 
 $\Theta $
 is a set of
$\Theta $
 is a set of 
 $p'$
-elements of
$p'$
-elements of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, we have
$\mathcal {L}$
, we have 
 $S\cap \Theta =\mathbf {1}$
, and we may therefore identify S with
$S\cap \Theta =\mathbf {1}$
, and we may therefore identify S with 
 $\bar S$
 and
$\bar S$
 and 
 $\Delta $
 with
$\Delta $
 with 
 $\bar \Delta $
. Point (a) is then given by Corollary 4.5.
$\bar \Delta $
. Point (a) is then given by Corollary 4.5.
 For each 
 $P\in \Delta $
 let
$P\in \Delta $
 let 
 $\rho _P$
 be the restriction of
$\rho _P$
 be the restriction of 
 $\rho $
 to
$\rho $
 to 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
. Then
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
. Then 
 $\rho _P$
 is an epimorphism
$\rho _P$
 is an epimorphism 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)\to N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(P)$
 by Theorem 4.3(c), with kernel
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)\to N_{\bar {\mathcal {L}}}(P)$
 by Theorem 4.3(c), with kernel 
 $\Theta (P)$
. This yields point (c).
$\Theta (P)$
. This yields point (c).
 By Theorem 4.3(c), the conjugation maps 
 $c_g:P\to Q$
 in
$c_g:P\to Q$
 in 
 $\mathcal {F}$
, with
$\mathcal {F}$
, with 
 $P,Q\in \Delta $
 and with
$P,Q\in \Delta $
 and with 
 $g\in \mathcal {L}$
, are the same as the conjugation maps
$g\in \mathcal {L}$
, are the same as the conjugation maps 
 $c_{\bar g}:P\to Q$
 with
$c_{\bar g}:P\to Q$
 with 
 $\bar g\in \mathcal {L}/\Theta $
. Since
$\bar g\in \mathcal {L}/\Theta $
. Since 
 $\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L})$
 is
$\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L})$
 is 
 $\Delta $
-generated (by Definition 2.11), we obtain
$\Delta $
-generated (by Definition 2.11), we obtain 
 $\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L})=\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L}/\Theta )$
. That is, (b) holds, and the proof is complete.
$\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L})=\mathcal {F}_S(\mathcal {L}/\Theta )$
. That is, (b) holds, and the proof is complete.
5 Products of partial normal subgroups
There are two main results in this section. The first (Theorem 5.1) concerns products of partial normal subgroups in a locality. The second (Proposition 5.5) is an application of essentially all of the results preceding it, and it will play a vital role in Part III of the series.
Theorem 5.1. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, and let 
 $\mathcal {M}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 and
$\mathcal {M}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be partial normal subgroups. Set
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be partial normal subgroups. Set 
 $U=S\cap \mathcal {M}$
 and
$U=S\cap \mathcal {M}$
 and 
 $V=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
, and assume
$V=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
, and assume 
- 
(*)  $\mathcal {M}$
 normalises V, and $\mathcal {M}$
 normalises V, and $\mathcal {N}$
 normalises U. $\mathcal {N}$
 normalises U.
Then 
 $\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=\mathcal {N}\mathcal {M}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and
$\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=\mathcal {N}\mathcal {M}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and 
 $S\cap \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=UV$
.
$S\cap \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=UV$
.
The proof will require the following version of the splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12).
Lemma 5.2. Assume the hypothesis of Theorem 5.1, and let 
 $g\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
. Then there exists
$g\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
. Then there exists 
 $(x,y)\in \mathbf {D}$
 with
$(x,y)\in \mathbf {D}$
 with 
 $x\in \mathcal {M}$
,
$x\in \mathcal {M}$
, 
 $y\in \mathcal {N}$
,
$y\in \mathcal {N}$
, 
 $g=xy$
, and
$g=xy$
, and 
 $S_g=S_{(x,y)}$
.
$S_g=S_{(x,y)}$
.
Proof. Consider the set of all triples 
 $(g,x,y)\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}\times \mathcal {M}\times \mathcal {N}$
 such that g is a counterexample to the lemma and
$(g,x,y)\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}\times \mathcal {M}\times \mathcal {N}$
 such that g is a counterexample to the lemma and 
 $g=xy$
. Among all such triples, let
$g=xy$
. Among all such triples, let 
 $(g,x,y)$
 be chosen so that
$(g,x,y)$
 be chosen so that 
 $|S_{(x,y)}|$
 is as large as possible. Set
$|S_{(x,y)}|$
 is as large as possible. Set 
 $Q=S_{(x,y)}$
, and set
$Q=S_{(x,y)}$
, and set 
 $P=N_{S_g}(Q)$
. It suffices to show that
$P=N_{S_g}(Q)$
. It suffices to show that 
 $P=Q$
 in order to obtain the lemma.
$P=Q$
 in order to obtain the lemma.
 By Lemma 3.2, we have 
 $(y,y^{-1},x,y)\in \mathbf {D}$
 and
$(y,y^{-1},x,y)\in \mathbf {D}$
 and 
 $g=yx^y$
, with
$g=yx^y$
, with 
 $S_{(x,y)}=S_{(y,x^y)}$
. Suppose that
$S_{(x,y)}=S_{(y,x^y)}$
. Suppose that 
 $P\leq S_y$
. Then
$P\leq S_y$
. Then 
 $P^y\leq S$
, and since
$P^y\leq S$
, and since 
 $P^g\leq S$
, we conclude that
$P^g\leq S$
, we conclude that 
 $P\leq S_{(y,x^y)}$
, and hence
$P\leq S_{(y,x^y)}$
, and hence 
 $P=Q$
, as desired. Thus we may assume
$P=Q$
, as desired. Thus we may assume 
- 
(1)  $P\nleq S_y$
. $P\nleq S_y$
.
Let h be 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal (with respect to
$\uparrow $
-maximal (with respect to 
 $\mathcal {M}$
) in the maximal coset of
$\mathcal {M}$
) in the maximal coset of 
 $\mathcal {M}$
 containing g. By Proposition 3.14(c), there exists
$\mathcal {M}$
 containing g. By Proposition 3.14(c), there exists 
 $r\in \mathcal {M}$
 such that
$r\in \mathcal {M}$
 such that 
 $g=rh$
, and Lemma 3.12 yields
$g=rh$
, and Lemma 3.12 yields 
 $S_g=S_{(r,h)}$
. Then
$S_g=S_{(r,h)}$
. Then 
 $Q\leq S_{(r,h)}$
, so
$Q\leq S_{(r,h)}$
, so 
 $(y^{-1},x^{-1},r,h)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$(y^{-1},x^{-1},r,h)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $Q^g$
 and
$Q^g$
 and 
 $\Pi (y^{-1},x^{-1},r,h)=\Pi (g^{-1},g)=\mathbf {1}$
. Thus
$\Pi (y^{-1},x^{-1},r,h)=\Pi (g^{-1},g)=\mathbf {1}$
. Thus 
 $$ \begin{align} h=r^{-1} xy \quad\text{and}\quad r^{-1} x=hy^{-1}.  \end{align} $$
$$ \begin{align} h=r^{-1} xy \quad\text{and}\quad r^{-1} x=hy^{-1}.  \end{align} $$
We have 
 $y\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
 by Theorem 5.1(*) and
$y\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
 by Theorem 5.1(*) and 
 $h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
 by Proposition 3.9. Hence
$h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
 by Proposition 3.9. Hence 
 $r^{-1} x\in N_{\mathcal {M}}(U)$
, and then
$r^{-1} x\in N_{\mathcal {M}}(U)$
, and then 
 $h=(r^{-1} x)y\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
.
$h=(r^{-1} x)y\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
.
 Suppose that h does not provide a counterexample to the lemma. That is, suppose that there exists 
 $x'\in \mathcal {M}$
 and
$x'\in \mathcal {M}$
 and 
 $y'\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that
$y'\in \mathcal {N}$
 such that 
 $(x',y')\in \mathbf {D}$
,
$(x',y')\in \mathbf {D}$
, 
 $x'y'=h$
, and
$x'y'=h$
, and 
 $S_{(x',y')}=S_h$
. As
$S_{(x',y')}=S_h$
. As 
 $r^{-1} xy=h=x'y'$
, we get
$r^{-1} xy=h=x'y'$
, we get 
 $xy=rx'y'$
, and
$xy=rx'y'$
, and 
 $(r,x',y')\in \mathbf {D}$
 with
$(r,x',y')\in \mathbf {D}$
 with 
 $rx'y'=rh=g$
. The idea now is to replace
$rx'y'=rh=g$
. The idea now is to replace 
 $(x,y)$
 with
$(x,y)$
 with 
 $(rx',y')$
 and contradict the assumption that
$(rx',y')$
 and contradict the assumption that 
 $S_g\neq Q$
. To achieve this, observe first that
$S_g\neq Q$
. To achieve this, observe first that 
 $S_g\leq S_r$
 since
$S_g\leq S_r$
 since 
 $S_{(r,h)}=S_{rh}=S_g$
. Then observe that
$S_{(r,h)}=S_{rh}=S_g$
. Then observe that 
 $(S_g)^r\leq S_h$
 and
$(S_g)^r\leq S_h$
 and 
 $S_h=S_{(x',y')}\leq S_{x'}$
. Thus
$S_h=S_{(x',y')}\leq S_{x'}$
. Thus 
 $(S_g)^r\leq S_{x'}$
, so
$(S_g)^r\leq S_{x'}$
, so 
 $S_g\leq S_{rx'}$
. As
$S_g\leq S_{rx'}$
. As 
 $rx'y'=g$
, we conclude that
$rx'y'=g$
, we conclude that 
 $S_g\leq S_{(rx',y')}$
, which yields the desired contradiction. We conclude that h is itself a counterexample to the lemma.
$S_g\leq S_{(rx',y')}$
, which yields the desired contradiction. We conclude that h is itself a counterexample to the lemma.
 Recall that we have 
 $r^{-1} x\in N_{\mathcal {M}}(U)$
. Then
$r^{-1} x\in N_{\mathcal {M}}(U)$
. Then 
 $U\leq S_{(r^{-1} x,y)}$
 since
$U\leq S_{(r^{-1} x,y)}$
 since 
 $h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
. Note furthermore that
$h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
. Note furthermore that 
 $Q=S_{(x,y)}\leq S_g=S_{(r,h)}\leq S_r$
, and thus
$Q=S_{(x,y)}\leq S_g=S_{(r,h)}\leq S_r$
, and thus 
 $Q^rU\leq S_{(r^{-1} x,y)}$
. The maximality of
$Q^rU\leq S_{(r^{-1} x,y)}$
. The maximality of 
 $|Q|$
 in our initial choice of
$|Q|$
 in our initial choice of 
 $(g,x,y)$
 then yields
$(g,x,y)$
 then yields 
 $Q^r=Q^rU=S_{(r^{-1} x,y)}$
. Thus
$Q^r=Q^rU=S_{(r^{-1} x,y)}$
. Thus 
 $U^r\leq Q^r$
, and conjugation by
$U^r\leq Q^r$
, and conjugation by 
 $r^{-1}$
 yields
$r^{-1}$
 yields 
 $U\leq Q$
. A symmetric argument yields
$U\leq Q$
. A symmetric argument yields 
 $V\leq Q$
. Setting
$V\leq Q$
. Setting 
 $H=N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
, it now follows from Lemma 3.1(b) that
$H=N_{\mathcal {L}}(Q)$
, it now follows from Lemma 3.1(b) that 
 $x,y\in H$
.
$x,y\in H$
.
 Set 
 $X=H\cap \mathcal {M}$
 and
$X=H\cap \mathcal {M}$
 and 
 $Y=H\cap \mathcal {N}$
. Then
$Y=H\cap \mathcal {N}$
. Then 
 $X,Y$
 and
$X,Y$
 and 
 $UV$
 are normal subgroups of H, and
$UV$
 are normal subgroups of H, and 
 $XY/UV$
 is a
$XY/UV$
 is a 
 $p'$
-group. Set
$p'$
-group. Set 
 $\bar H=H/(X\cap Y)UV$
. Here
$\bar H=H/(X\cap Y)UV$
. Here 
 $P\leq H$
 and
$P\leq H$
 and 
 $[P,g]\leq S$
. Since
$[P,g]\leq S$
. Since 
 $g\in XY$
, we obtain
$g\in XY$
, we obtain 
 $$ \begin{align*}[\bar P,\bar g]=[\bar P,\bar x\bar y]\leq \bar X\bar Y, \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}[\bar P,\bar g]=[\bar P,\bar x\bar y]\leq \bar X\bar Y, \end{align*} $$
and since 
 $\bar X\bar Y$
 is a
$\bar X\bar Y$
 is a 
 $p'$
-group we get
$p'$
-group we get 
 $[\bar P,\bar g]=1$
. As
$[\bar P,\bar g]=1$
. As 
 $\bar X\cap \bar Y=1$
, we have
$\bar X\cap \bar Y=1$
, we have 
 $C_{\bar X\bar Y}(\bar P)=C_{\bar X}(\bar P)\times C_{\bar Y}(\bar P)$
. As
$C_{\bar X\bar Y}(\bar P)=C_{\bar X}(\bar P)\times C_{\bar Y}(\bar P)$
. As 
 $\bar g=\bar x\bar y$
, it follows that
$\bar g=\bar x\bar y$
, it follows that 
 $\bar x$
 and
$\bar x$
 and 
 $\bar y$
 centralise
$\bar y$
 centralise 
 $\bar P$
. Thus
$\bar P$
. Thus 
 $P^x\leq (X\cap Y)P$
 and
$P^x\leq (X\cap Y)P$
 and 
 $P\in Syl_p((X\cap Y)P)$
. By Sylow’s theorem, there exists
$P\in Syl_p((X\cap Y)P)$
. By Sylow’s theorem, there exists 
 $z\in X\cap Y$
 with
$z\in X\cap Y$
 with 
 $P^x=P^z$
. We then get
$P^x=P^z$
. We then get 
 $g=(xz^{-1})(zy)$
 and
$g=(xz^{-1})(zy)$
 and 
 $P\leq S_{(xz^{-1},zy)}$
. This contradicts the maximality of Q and yields a final contradiction, proving the lemma.
$P\leq S_{(xz^{-1},zy)}$
. This contradicts the maximality of Q and yields a final contradiction, proving the lemma.
Proof of Theorem 5.1
 Let 
 $w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N})\cap \mathbf {D}$
 via
$w=(g_1,\cdots ,g_n)\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N})\cap \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $Q\in \Delta $
. By Lemma 5.2, we may write
$Q\in \Delta $
. By Lemma 5.2, we may write 
 $g_i=x_iy_i$
 with
$g_i=x_iy_i$
 with 
 $x_i\in \mathcal {M}$
,
$x_i\in \mathcal {M}$
, 
 $y_i\in \mathcal {N}$
, and with
$y_i\in \mathcal {N}$
, and with 
 $S_{g_i}=S_{(x_i,y_i)}$
. Set
$S_{g_i}=S_{(x_i,y_i)}$
. Set 
 $w'=(x_1,y_1,\cdots ,x_n,y_n)$
. Then
$w'=(x_1,y_1,\cdots ,x_n,y_n)$
. Then 
 $w'\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Q and
$w'\in \mathbf {D}$
 via Q and 
 $\Pi (w)=\Pi (w')$
. Since each
$\Pi (w)=\Pi (w')$
. Since each 
 $y_i$
 normalises U, it follows from Lemma 3.4 that
$y_i$
 normalises U, it follows from Lemma 3.4 that 
 $\Pi (w')=\Pi (w'')$
 for some
$\Pi (w')=\Pi (w'')$
 for some 
 $w''\in \mathbf {D}$
 such that
$w''\in \mathbf {D}$
 such that 
 $w''=(x)\circ (y_1,\cdots ,y_n))$
, where
$w''=(x)\circ (y_1,\cdots ,y_n))$
, where 
 $x\in \mathcal {M}$
. Thus
$x\in \mathcal {M}$
. Thus 
 $\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
 is closed under
$\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
 is closed under 
 $\Pi $
. To show that
$\Pi $
. To show that 
 $\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=(\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N})^{-1}$
, we note that if
$\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=(\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N})^{-1}$
, we note that if 
 $(x,y)\in \mathbf {D}\cap (\mathcal {M}\times \mathcal {N})$
, then
$(x,y)\in \mathbf {D}\cap (\mathcal {M}\times \mathcal {N})$
, then 
 $(y^{-1},x^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
, and that
$(y^{-1},x^{-1})\in \mathbf {D}$
, and that 
 $y^{-1} x^{-1}\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
 by Lemma 3.2. Thus
$y^{-1} x^{-1}\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
 by Lemma 3.2. Thus 
 $\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial subgroup of
$\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
. Moreover, we have shown that
$\mathcal {L}$
. Moreover, we have shown that 
 $\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=\mathcal {N}\mathcal {M}$
.
$\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=\mathcal {N}\mathcal {M}$
.
 Let 
 $g\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
, and let
$g\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
, and let 
 $f\in \mathcal {L}$
 with
$f\in \mathcal {L}$
 with 
 $(f^{-1},g,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
. By Lemma 3.12, we may write
$(f^{-1},g,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
. By Lemma 3.12, we may write 
 $f=hr$
 with
$f=hr$
 with 
 $r\in \mathcal {N}$
,
$r\in \mathcal {N}$
, 
 $h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
 and
$h\in N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
 and 
 $S_f=S_{(h,r)}$
. Write
$S_f=S_{(h,r)}$
. Write 
 $g=xy$
 as in Lemma 5.2. By assumption, we have
$g=xy$
 as in Lemma 5.2. By assumption, we have 
 $(f^{-1},g,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via some
$(f^{-1},g,f)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via some 
 $P\in \Delta $
. Setting
$P\in \Delta $
. Setting 
 $v=(r^{-1},h^{-1},x,y,h,r)$
, it follows that
$v=(r^{-1},h^{-1},x,y,h,r)$
, it follows that 
 $v\in \mathbf {D}$
 via P and
$v\in \mathbf {D}$
 via P and 
 $g^f=\Pi (v)$
. Here
$g^f=\Pi (v)$
. Here 
 $(h^{-1},h,y,h)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$(h^{-1},h,y,h)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $S_{(y,h)}$
 by Lemma 3.2, so
$S_{(y,h)}$
 by Lemma 3.2, so 
 $v':=(r^{-1},h^{-1},x,h,h^{-1},y,h,r)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via P. Then
$v':=(r^{-1},h^{-1},x,h,h^{-1},y,h,r)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via P. Then 
 $$ \begin{align*}g^f=\Pi(v)=\Pi(v')=(x^h y^h)^r\in(\mathcal{M}\mathcal{N})^r. \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}g^f=\Pi(v)=\Pi(v')=(x^h y^h)^r\in(\mathcal{M}\mathcal{N})^r. \end{align*} $$
Since 
 $r\in \mathcal {N}$
 and
$r\in \mathcal {N}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial group, we conclude that
$\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
 is a partial group, we conclude that 
 $g^f\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
. Thus
$g^f\in \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
. Thus 
 $\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
$\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
 Set 
 $M=N_{\mathcal {M}}(S)$
,
$M=N_{\mathcal {M}}(S)$
, 
 $N=N_{\mathcal {N}}(S)$
, and let
$N=N_{\mathcal {N}}(S)$
, and let 
 $s\in S\cap \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
. Then Lemma 5.2 yields
$s\in S\cap \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}$
. Then Lemma 5.2 yields 
 $s=fg$
 with
$s=fg$
 with 
 $f\in \mathcal {M}$
,
$f\in \mathcal {M}$
, 
 $g\in \mathcal {N}$
 and with
$g\in \mathcal {N}$
 and with 
 $S=S_{(f,g)}$
. Thus
$S=S_{(f,g)}$
. Thus 
 $f\in M$
 and
$f\in M$
 and 
 $g\in N$
, where M and N are normal subgroups of the group
$g\in N$
, where M and N are normal subgroups of the group 
 $N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
. Then
$N_{\mathcal {L}}(S)$
. Then 
 $UV$
 is a normal Sylow p-subgroup of
$UV$
 is a normal Sylow p-subgroup of 
 $MN$
, and since
$MN$
, and since 
 $s=fg\in MN$
, we obtain
$s=fg\in MN$
, we obtain 
 $s\in UV$
. Thus
$s\in UV$
. Thus 
 $S\cap \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=UV$
, and the proof is complete.
$S\cap \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=UV$
, and the proof is complete. 
 $ \Box $
$ \Box $
Lemma 5.3. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let 
 $\mathcal {M}$
 and
$\mathcal {M}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {N}$
 be partial normal subgroups of
$\mathcal {N}$
 be partial normal subgroups of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
, and set
$\mathcal {L}$
, and set 
 $U=S\cap \mathcal {M}$
 and
$U=S\cap \mathcal {M}$
 and 
 $V=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
. Suppose that
$V=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
. Suppose that 
 $\mathcal {M}\cap \mathcal {N}\leq S$
. Then
$\mathcal {M}\cap \mathcal {N}\leq S$
. Then 
 $\mathcal {M}\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
 and
$\mathcal {M}\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
 and 
 $\mathcal {N}\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
.
$\mathcal {N}\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
.
Proof. Let 
 $g\in \mathcal {M}$
, set
$g\in \mathcal {M}$
, set 
 $P=S_g$
, and let
$P=S_g$
, and let 
 $x\in N_V(P)$
. Then
$x\in N_V(P)$
. Then 
 $(x^{-1},g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via
$(x^{-1},g^{-1},x,g)\in \mathbf {D}$
 via 
 $P^{gx}$
, and then
$P^{gx}$
, and then 
 $x^{-1} g^{-1} xg\in \mathcal {M}\cap \mathcal {N}$
. The hypothesis then yields
$x^{-1} g^{-1} xg\in \mathcal {M}\cap \mathcal {N}$
. The hypothesis then yields 
 $x^g\in S$
, and thus
$x^g\in S$
, and thus 
 $N_V(P)\leq P$
. Since
$N_V(P)\leq P$
. Since 
 $PV$
 is a subgroup of S, we conclude that
$PV$
 is a subgroup of S, we conclude that 
 $V\leq P$
, and then
$V\leq P$
, and then 
 $V^g=V$
 by Lemma 3.1(a). Thus
$V^g=V$
 by Lemma 3.1(a). Thus 
 $\mathcal {M} \leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
, and a symmetric argument shows that
$\mathcal {M} \leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(V)$
, and a symmetric argument shows that 
 $\mathcal {N}\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
.
$\mathcal {N}\leq N_{\mathcal {L}}(U)$
.
Corollary 5.4. Let 
 $\mathcal {M},\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 and suppose that
$\mathcal {M},\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 and suppose that 
 $\mathcal {M}\cap \mathcal {N}\leq S$
. Then
$\mathcal {M}\cap \mathcal {N}\leq S$
. Then 
 $\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and
$\mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and 
 $S\cap \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=(S\cap \mathcal {M})(S\cap \mathcal {N})$
.
$S\cap \mathcal {M}\mathcal {N}=(S\cap \mathcal {M})(S\cap \mathcal {N})$
.
 Recall that a finite group G is of characteristic p if 
 $C_G(O_p(G))\leq O_p(G)$
.
$C_G(O_p(G))\leq O_p(G)$
.
Proposition 5.5. Let 
 $(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let
$(\mathcal {L},\Delta ,S)$
 be a locality, let 
 $\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be a partial normal subgroup, set
$\mathcal {N}\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
 be a partial normal subgroup, set 
 $T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
, set
$T=S\cap \mathcal {N}$
, set 
 $\mathcal {L}_T=N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, and let
$\mathcal {L}_T=N_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
, and let 
 $\mathcal {K}$
 be a partial normal subgroup of
$\mathcal {K}$
 be a partial normal subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}_T$
. Assume
$\mathcal {L}_T$
. Assume 
- 
(1) Each of the groups  $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
 for $N_{\mathcal {L}}(P)$
 for $P\in \Delta $
 is of characteristic p, and $P\in \Delta $
 is of characteristic p, and
- 
(2)  $\mathcal {K}\leq C_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
. $\mathcal {K}\leq C_{\mathcal {L}}(T)$
.
Then 
 $\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and
$\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
, and 
 $S\cap \langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle =(S\cap \mathcal {K})T$
. Moreover, if
$S\cap \langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle =(S\cap \mathcal {K})T$
. Moreover, if 
 $S=C_S(T)T$
, then
$S=C_S(T)T$
, then 
 $\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle =\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}=\mathcal {N}\mathcal {K}$
.
$\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle =\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}=\mathcal {N}\mathcal {K}$
.
Proof. Set 
 $\mathcal {N}_T=N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)$
. Then
$\mathcal {N}_T=N_{\mathcal {N}}(T)$
. Then 
 $\mathcal {N}_T\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}_T$
 by Lemma 1.8. View
$\mathcal {N}_T\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}_T$
 by Lemma 1.8. View 
 $\mathcal {L}_T$
 as a locality
$\mathcal {L}_T$
 as a locality 
 $(\mathcal {L}_T,\Delta ,S)$
 as in Lemma 2.12. The condition (1) allows us to apply Lemma 3.7 and thereby conclude that
$(\mathcal {L}_T,\Delta ,S)$
 as in Lemma 2.12. The condition (1) allows us to apply Lemma 3.7 and thereby conclude that 
 $\mathcal {N}_T$
 normalises
$\mathcal {N}_T$
 normalises 
 $C_S(T)T$
. Set
$C_S(T)T$
. Set 
 $U=S\cap \mathcal {K}$
. Then
$U=S\cap \mathcal {K}$
. Then 
 $U\leq C_S(T)$
 by (2), and then
$U\leq C_S(T)$
 by (2), and then 
 $[U,\mathcal {N}_T]\leq C_S(T)T\cap \mathcal {K}=U$
. Thus
$[U,\mathcal {N}_T]\leq C_S(T)T\cap \mathcal {K}=U$
. Thus 
 $\mathcal {N}_T$
 normalises U. Since
$\mathcal {N}_T$
 normalises U. Since 
 $\mathcal {K}$
 normalises T, we conclude from Theorem 5.1 that
$\mathcal {K}$
 normalises T, we conclude from Theorem 5.1 that 
 $\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}_T\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}_T$
.
$\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}_T\trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}_T$
.
 Let 
 $\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be the quotient locality
$\bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be the quotient locality 
 $\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
, and let
$\mathcal {L}/\mathcal {N}$
, and let 
 $\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be the canonical projection. Then the restriction of
$\rho :\mathcal {L}\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 be the canonical projection. Then the restriction of 
 $\rho $
 to
$\rho $
 to 
 $\mathcal {L}_T$
 is a projection
$\mathcal {L}_T$
 is a projection 
 $\mathcal {L}_T\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 by Proposition 4.11, and
$\mathcal {L}_T\to \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 by Proposition 4.11, and 
 $(\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}_T)\rho =\mathcal {K}\rho $
. Then
$(\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}_T)\rho =\mathcal {K}\rho $
. Then 
 $\mathcal {K}\rho \trianglelefteq \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 by partial subgroup correspondence (Proposition 4.7). The
$\mathcal {K}\rho \trianglelefteq \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
 by partial subgroup correspondence (Proposition 4.7). The 
 $\rho $
-preimage of
$\rho $
-preimage of 
 $\mathcal {K}\rho $
 in
$\mathcal {K}\rho $
 in 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 is then a partial normal subgroup of
$\mathcal {L}$
 is then a partial normal subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 containing the partial subgroup
$\mathcal {L}$
 containing the partial subgroup 
 $\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
 of
$\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
 of 
 $\mathcal {L}$
 generated by
$\mathcal {L}$
 generated by 
 $\mathcal {K}$
 and
$\mathcal {K}$
 and 
 $\mathcal {N}$
.
$\mathcal {N}$
.
 By Lemma 1.9, 
 $\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
 is the union of its subsets
$\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
 is the union of its subsets 
 $Y_i$
, where
$Y_i$
, where 
 $Y_0=\mathcal {K}\cup \mathcal {N}$
 and (for
$Y_0=\mathcal {K}\cup \mathcal {N}$
 and (for 
 $k>0$
)
$k>0$
) 
 $Y_k$
 is the set of all
$Y_k$
 is the set of all 
 $\Pi (w)$
 with
$\Pi (w)$
 with 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}(Y_{k-1})\cap \mathbf {D}$
. Clearly
$w\in \mathbf {W}(Y_{k-1})\cap \mathbf {D}$
. Clearly 
 $\rho $
 maps
$\rho $
 maps 
 $Y_0$
 into
$Y_0$
 into 
 $\mathcal {K}\rho $
, and a straightforward induction on k then shows that
$\mathcal {K}\rho $
, and a straightforward induction on k then shows that 
 $\rho $
 maps each
$\rho $
 maps each 
 $Y_k$
 into
$Y_k$
 into 
 $\mathcal {K}\rho $
. Thus
$\mathcal {K}\rho $
. Thus 
 $\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
 is mapped onto
$\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
 is mapped onto 
 $\mathcal {K}\rho $
, and partial subgroup correspondence then implies that
$\mathcal {K}\rho $
, and partial subgroup correspondence then implies that 
 $\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
 is the preimage of
$\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
 is the preimage of 
 $\mathcal {K}\rho $
. As
$\mathcal {K}\rho $
. As 
 $\mathcal {K}\rho \trianglelefteq \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, a further application of partial subgroup correspondence yields
$\mathcal {K}\rho \trianglelefteq \bar {\mathcal {L}}$
, a further application of partial subgroup correspondence yields 
 $\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
$\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle \trianglelefteq \mathcal {L}$
.
 Set 
 $U=S\cap \mathcal {K}$
, and set
$U=S\cap \mathcal {K}$
, and set 
 $V=S\cap \langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
. Then the restriction of
$V=S\cap \langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle $
. Then the restriction of 
 $\rho $
 to V is a homomorphism of groups by Lemma 1.16, with kernel T. Here U is a maximal p-subgroup of
$\rho $
 to V is a homomorphism of groups by Lemma 1.16, with kernel T. Here U is a maximal p-subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {K}$
 by Lemma 3.1(c), and both
$\mathcal {K}$
 by Lemma 3.1(c), and both 
 $V\rho $
 and
$V\rho $
 and 
 $U\rho $
 are maximal p-subgroups of
$U\rho $
 are maximal p-subgroups of 
 $\mathcal {K}\rho $
 by Corollary 4.10. Then
$\mathcal {K}\rho $
 by Corollary 4.10. Then 
 $V\rho =U\rho $
 and
$V\rho =U\rho $
 and 
 $V=UT$
.
$V=UT$
.
 Suppose now that 
 $S=C_S(T)T$
. Then each element of
$S=C_S(T)T$
. Then each element of 
 $\mathcal {K}$
 is
$\mathcal {K}$
 is 
 $\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to
$\uparrow $
-maximal with respect to 
 $\mathcal {N}$
, by Lemma 3.10. Let
$\mathcal {N}$
, by Lemma 3.10. Let 
 $w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N})\cap \mathbf {D}$
, write
$w\in \mathbf {W}(\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N})\cap \mathbf {D}$
, write 
 $w=(x_1y_1,\cdots ,x_ny_n)$
 with
$w=(x_1y_1,\cdots ,x_ny_n)$
 with 
 $x_i\in \mathcal {K}$
 and
$x_i\in \mathcal {K}$
 and 
 $y_i\in \mathcal {N}$
, and set
$y_i\in \mathcal {N}$
, and set 
 $w'=(x_1,y_1,\cdots ,x_n,y_n)$
. Then
$w'=(x_1,y_1,\cdots ,x_n,y_n)$
. Then 
 $w'\in \mathbf {D}$
 by the splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12), and
$w'\in \mathbf {D}$
 by the splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12), and 
 $\Pi (w)=\Pi (w')$
. Here
$\Pi (w)=\Pi (w')$
. Here 
 $\Pi (w')\in \mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}$
 by Lemma 3.4, so
$\Pi (w')\in \mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}$
 by Lemma 3.4, so 
 $\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle =\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}$
 in this case. One similarly has
$\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle =\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}$
 in this case. One similarly has 
 $\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle =\mathcal {N}\mathcal {K}$
, completing the proof.
$\langle \mathcal {K},\mathcal {N}\,\rangle =\mathcal {N}\mathcal {K}$
, completing the proof.
Remark 5.6. In the proof of Proposition 5.5, hypothesis (2) serves no other purpose than to guarantee that 
 $\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}_T$
 is a partial normal subgroup of
$\mathcal {K}\mathcal {N}_T$
 is a partial normal subgroup of 
 $\mathcal {L}_T$
. In fact, by [Reference HenkeHe, Theorem A in], the product of partial normal subgroups of a locality is always a partial normal subgroup, so (2) is redundant.
$\mathcal {L}_T$
. In fact, by [Reference HenkeHe, Theorem A in], the product of partial normal subgroups of a locality is always a partial normal subgroup, so (2) is redundant.
Appendix A Limits and colimits in the category of partial groups
This appendix was inspired by some remarks of Edoardo Salati, who identified a serious gap in the author’s earlier treatment of colimits and who has himself shown [Reference SalatiSal] that the category of partial groups is complete (has all limits) and co-complete (has all colimits). The discussion here will establish a somewhat weaker result.
By a pointed set, we mean a set with a distinguished base-point. There is then a category 
 $Set^*$
 of pointed sets with base-point-preserving maps. Let
$Set^*$
 of pointed sets with base-point-preserving maps. Let 
 $Part$
 be the category of partial groups. There is then a forgetful functor
$Part$
 be the category of partial groups. There is then a forgetful functor 
 $Part\to Set^*$
, given by regarding a partial group as a pointed set having the identity element as its base-point.
$Part\to Set^*$
, given by regarding a partial group as a pointed set having the identity element as its base-point.
 To discuss limits and colimits in 
 $Part$
 (and their relation with limits and colimits in
$Part$
 (and their relation with limits and colimits in 
 $Set^*$
), we begin by reviewing the relevant definitions.
$Set^*$
), we begin by reviewing the relevant definitions.
Definition Appendix A.1. Let J be a small category, and let 
 $\mathcal {C}$
 be a category. By a J-shaped diagram in
$\mathcal {C}$
 be a category. By a J-shaped diagram in 
 $\mathcal {C}$
, we mean a covariant functor
$\mathcal {C}$
, we mean a covariant functor 
 $F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
.
$F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
.
As always, composition of mappings will be written from left to right.
Definition Appendix A.2. Let 
 $F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
 be a J-shaped diagram in
$F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
 be a J-shaped diagram in 
 $\mathcal {C}$
. A cone to F consists of an object M of
$\mathcal {C}$
. A cone to F consists of an object M of 
 $\mathcal {C}$
 together with a family
$\mathcal {C}$
 together with a family 
 $\phi =(\phi _X:M\to F(X))_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 of
$\phi =(\phi _X:M\to F(X))_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 of 
 $\mathcal {C}$
-morphisms, such that for each J-morphism
$\mathcal {C}$
-morphisms, such that for each J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
, we have
$f:X\to Y$
, we have 
 $\phi _Y=\phi _X\circ F(f)$
. The cone
$\phi _Y=\phi _X\circ F(f)$
. The cone 
 $(M,\phi )$
 is a limit of F if for every cone
$(M,\phi )$
 is a limit of F if for every cone 
 $(N,\psi )$
 to F, there exists a unique
$(N,\psi )$
 to F, there exists a unique 
 $\mathcal {C}$
-morphism
$\mathcal {C}$
-morphism 
 $u:N\to M$
 such that
$u:N\to M$
 such that 
 $\psi _X=u\circ \phi _X$
 for all
$\psi _X=u\circ \phi _X$
 for all 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
.
$X\in Ob(J)$
.
 Consider now the case in which 
 $\mathcal {C}$
 is the category of sets (and mappings of sets), and let
$\mathcal {C}$
 is the category of sets (and mappings of sets), and let 
 $F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
 be a J-shaped diagram. If the only J-morphisms are identity morphisms, then the direct product
$F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
 be a J-shaped diagram. If the only J-morphisms are identity morphisms, then the direct product 
 $\widehat M$
 of the sets
$\widehat M$
 of the sets 
 $F(X)$
 for
$F(X)$
 for 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
, together with the set
$X\in Ob(J)$
, together with the set 
 $\widehat \phi $
 of associated projection maps, is a limit of F. More generally, let M be the subset of
$\widehat \phi $
 of associated projection maps, is a limit of F. More generally, let M be the subset of 
 $\widehat M$
 consisting of all
$\widehat M$
 consisting of all 
 $Ob(J)$
-tuples
$Ob(J)$
-tuples 
 $(a_X)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 such that, for each J-morphism
$(a_X)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 such that, for each J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
, we have
$f:X\to Y$
, we have 
 $a_Y=(a_X)F(f)$
 (
$a_Y=(a_X)F(f)$
 (
 $a_Y$
 is equal to the image of
$a_Y$
 is equal to the image of 
 $a_X$
 under
$a_X$
 under 
 $F(f)$
). Then M, together with the set
$F(f)$
). Then M, together with the set 
 $\phi $
 of maps
$\phi $
 of maps 
 $\phi _X:M\to F(X)$
, where
$\phi _X:M\to F(X)$
, where 
 $\phi _X$
 is the restriction to M of the projection
$\phi _X$
 is the restriction to M of the projection 
 $\widehat \phi _X:\widehat M\to F(X)$
, is a limit of F. If instead
$\widehat \phi _X:\widehat M\to F(X)$
, is a limit of F. If instead 
 $\mathcal {C}$
 is taken to be the category
$\mathcal {C}$
 is taken to be the category 
 $Set^*$
 of pointed sets, then
$Set^*$
 of pointed sets, then 
 $\widehat M$
 and M are pointed sets (via the
$\widehat M$
 and M are pointed sets (via the 
 $Ob(J)$
-tuple of base-points
$Ob(J)$
-tuple of base-points 
 $*_X\in F(X)$
), and one observes that
$*_X\in F(X)$
), and one observes that 
 $(M,\phi )$
 is again a limit of F.
$(M,\phi )$
 is again a limit of F.
Theorem Appendix A.3. Let 
 $Part$
 be the category of partial groups, let
$Part$
 be the category of partial groups, let 
 $Set^*$
 be the category of pointed sets, let J be a small category, and let
$Set^*$
 be the category of pointed sets, let J be a small category, and let 
 $F:J\to Part$
 be a J-shaped diagram. Let
$F:J\to Part$
 be a J-shaped diagram. Let 
 $F_0:J\to Sets^*$
 be the composition of F with the forgetful functor
$F_0:J\to Sets^*$
 be the composition of F with the forgetful functor 
 $Part\to Sets^*$
. Then there exists a limit
$Part\to Sets^*$
. Then there exists a limit 
 $(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 of F, and the forgetful functor
$(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 of F, and the forgetful functor 
 $Part\to Set^*$
 sends
$Part\to Set^*$
 sends 
 $(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 to a limit of
$(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 to a limit of 
 $F_0$
.
$F_0$
.
Proof. We shall only outline the steps to the proof, leaving most details to the reader. Let 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 be the direct product (as sets) of the partial groups
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 be the direct product (as sets) of the partial groups 
 $F(X)$
 for
$F(X)$
 for 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
. Regard
$X\in Ob(J)$
. Regard 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 as a pointed set whose base-point is
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 as a pointed set whose base-point is 
 $Ob(J)$
-tuple of identity elements. Also, for
$Ob(J)$
-tuple of identity elements. Also, for 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
, regard
$X\in Ob(J)$
, regard 
 $\mathbf {D}(F(X))$
 as a pointed set whose base-point is the empty word. Let
$\mathbf {D}(F(X))$
 as a pointed set whose base-point is the empty word. Let 
 $\widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
 be the direct product of the pointed sets
$\widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
 be the direct product of the pointed sets 
 $\mathbf {D}(F(X))$
. Thus the members of
$\mathbf {D}(F(X))$
. Thus the members of 
 $\widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
 are
$\widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
 are 
 $Ob(J)$
-tuples
$Ob(J)$
-tuples 
 $(w_X)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
, with
$(w_X)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
, with 
 $w_X\in \mathbf {D}(F(X))$
. Let
$w_X\in \mathbf {D}(F(X))$
. Let 
 $\Pi _X:\mathbf {D}(F(X))\to F(X)$
 be the product. There is then a mapping
$\Pi _X:\mathbf {D}(F(X))\to F(X)$
 be the product. There is then a mapping 
 $$ \begin{align*}\widehat\Pi:\widehat{\mathbf{D}}\to\widehat{\mathcal{M}} \end{align*} $$
$$ \begin{align*}\widehat\Pi:\widehat{\mathbf{D}}\to\widehat{\mathcal{M}} \end{align*} $$
that sends 
 $(w_X)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 to
$(w_X)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 to 
 $(\Pi _X(w_X))_{X\in Ob(J)}$
. It is now straightforward to check that
$(\Pi _X(w_X))_{X\in Ob(J)}$
. It is now straightforward to check that 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 is a partial group via the product
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 is a partial group via the product 
 $\widehat \Pi $
 and via the inversion map that sends an element
$\widehat \Pi $
 and via the inversion map that sends an element 
 $(g_X)$
 of
$(g_X)$
 of 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 to the
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 to the 
 $Ob(J)$
-tuple
$Ob(J)$
-tuple 
 $(g_X^{-1})$
 of inverses.
$(g_X^{-1})$
 of inverses.
 Let 
 $\mathcal {M}$
 be the subset of
$\mathcal {M}$
 be the subset of 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 consisting of all
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 consisting of all 
 $Ob(J)$
-tuples
$Ob(J)$
-tuples 
 $(g_X)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 such that, for each J-morphism
$(g_X)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 such that, for each J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
, we have
$f:X\to Y$
, we have 
 $g_Y=(g_X)F(f)$
. Let
$g_Y=(g_X)F(f)$
. Let 
 $\phi $
 be the
$\phi $
 be the 
 $Ob(J)$
-tuple
$Ob(J)$
-tuple 
 $(\phi _X)$
 of maps
$(\phi _X)$
 of maps 
 $\phi _X:\mathcal {M}\to F(X)$
 obtained by restriction to
$\phi _X:\mathcal {M}\to F(X)$
 obtained by restriction to 
 $\mathcal {M}$
 of the projection
$\mathcal {M}$
 of the projection 
 $\widehat \phi _X:\widehat {\mathcal {M}}\to F(X)$
. One observes that each
$\widehat \phi _X:\widehat {\mathcal {M}}\to F(X)$
. One observes that each 
 $\phi _X$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups and that
$\phi _X$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups and that 
 $(\widehat {\mathcal {M}},\phi )$
 is a cone of F.
$(\widehat {\mathcal {M}},\phi )$
 is a cone of F.
 Now let 
 $(\mathcal {N},\psi )$
 be any cone of F. For
$(\mathcal {N},\psi )$
 be any cone of F. For 
 $g\in \mathcal {N}$
, define
$g\in \mathcal {N}$
, define 
 $g\mu $
 to be the
$g\mu $
 to be the 
 $Ob(J)$
-tuple
$Ob(J)$
-tuple 
 $(g\psi _X)$
. One checks that each such
$(g\psi _X)$
. One checks that each such 
 $g\mu $
 is an element of
$g\mu $
 is an element of 
 $\mathcal {M}$
 and then that the mapping
$\mathcal {M}$
 and then that the mapping 
 $\mu :\mathcal {N}\to \mathcal {M}$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups. Finally, one observes that
$\mu :\mathcal {N}\to \mathcal {M}$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups. Finally, one observes that 
 $\psi _X=u\circ \phi _X$
 for all
$\psi _X=u\circ \phi _X$
 for all 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
 and that u is necessarily the unique homomorphism
$X\in Ob(J)$
 and that u is necessarily the unique homomorphism 
 $\mathcal {N}\to \mathcal {M}$
 having this property. Thus
$\mathcal {N}\to \mathcal {M}$
 having this property. Thus 
 $(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 is a limit of F. Since also
$(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 is a limit of F. Since also 
 $(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 is a limit of
$(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 is a limit of 
 $F_0$
, the proof is complete.
$F_0$
, the proof is complete.
The situation for colimits of partial groups is not as straightforward as that of limits.
Definition Appendix A.4. Let 
 $F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
 be a J-shaped diagram in
$F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
 be a J-shaped diagram in 
 $\mathcal {C}$
. A co-cone to F consists of an object M of
$\mathcal {C}$
. A co-cone to F consists of an object M of 
 $\mathcal {C}$
 together with a family
$\mathcal {C}$
 together with a family 
 $\phi =(\phi _X:F(X)\to M)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 of
$\phi =(\phi _X:F(X)\to M)_{X\in Ob(J)}$
 of 
 $\mathcal {C}$
-morphisms, such that for each J-morphism
$\mathcal {C}$
-morphisms, such that for each J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
, we have
$f:X\to Y$
, we have 
 $\phi _X=F(f)\circ \phi _Y$
. The co-cone
$\phi _X=F(f)\circ \phi _Y$
. The co-cone 
 $(M,\phi )$
 is a colimit of the diagram F if for every co-cone
$(M,\phi )$
 is a colimit of the diagram F if for every co-cone 
 $(N,\psi )$
 to F, there exists a unique
$(N,\psi )$
 to F, there exists a unique 
 $\mathcal {C}$
-morphism
$\mathcal {C}$
-morphism 
 $u:M\to N$
 such that
$u:M\to N$
 such that 
 $\psi _X=\phi _X\circ u$
 for all
$\psi _X=\phi _X\circ u$
 for all 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
.
$X\in Ob(J)$
.
Again, it may be useful to review the case where 
 $\mathcal {C}$
 is the category of sets. Thus, let
$\mathcal {C}$
 is the category of sets. Thus, let 
 $F:J\to Sets$
 be a J-shaped diagram. Let
$F:J\to Sets$
 be a J-shaped diagram. Let 
 $\widehat M$
 be the disjoint union of the sets
$\widehat M$
 be the disjoint union of the sets 
 $F(X)$
 for
$F(X)$
 for 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
. Let
$X\in Ob(J)$
. Let 
 $\sim $
 be the relation on
$\sim $
 be the relation on 
 $\widehat M$
 given by
$\widehat M$
 given by 
 $a\sim b$
 if there exists a J-morphism
$a\sim b$
 if there exists a J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
 such that
$f:X\to Y$
 such that 
 $a\in F(X)$
,
$a\in F(X)$
, 
 $b\in F(Y)$
, and
$b\in F(Y)$
, and 
 $b=(a)F(f)$
 is the image of a under
$b=(a)F(f)$
 is the image of a under 
 $F(f)$
. Then
$F(f)$
. Then 
 $\sim $
 is reflexive, since F sends identity morphisms of J to identity maps of sets. Let
$\sim $
 is reflexive, since F sends identity morphisms of J to identity maps of sets. Let 
 $\approx $
 be the symmetrisation of
$\approx $
 be the symmetrisation of 
 $\sim $
 (so that
$\sim $
 (so that 
 $a\approx b$
 if either
$a\approx b$
 if either 
 $a\sim b$
 or
$a\sim b$
 or 
 $b\sim a$
). As
$b\sim a$
). As 
 $\sim $
 is transitive,
$\sim $
 is transitive, 
 $\approx $
 is then an equivalence relation. Let M be the set
$\approx $
 is then an equivalence relation. Let M be the set 
 $\widehat M/\approx $
 of equivalence classes, and let
$\widehat M/\approx $
 of equivalence classes, and let 
 $\phi $
 be the set of all
$\phi $
 be the set of all 
 $\phi _X:F(X)\to M$
, where
$\phi _X:F(X)\to M$
, where 
 $\phi _X$
 is the mapping that sends
$\phi _X$
 is the mapping that sends 
 $a\in F(X)$
 to the
$a\in F(X)$
 to the 
 $\approx $
-equivalence class of a in
$\approx $
-equivalence class of a in 
 $\widehat M$
. Then
$\widehat M$
. Then 
 $(M,\phi )$
 is a colimit of F.
$(M,\phi )$
 is a colimit of F.
Next, take 
 $\mathcal {C}$
 to be the category
$\mathcal {C}$
 to be the category 
 $Set^*$
, and let
$Set^*$
, and let 
 $F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
 be a J-shaped diagram in
$F:J\to \mathcal {C}$
 be a J-shaped diagram in 
 $\mathcal {C}$
. Here we take
$\mathcal {C}$
. Here we take 
 $\widehat M$
 to be the pointed set obtained from the disjoint union of the pointed sets
$\widehat M$
 to be the pointed set obtained from the disjoint union of the pointed sets 
 $F(X)$
 (over all
$F(X)$
 (over all 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
) by identifying base-points. For any J-morphism
$X\in Ob(J)$
) by identifying base-points. For any J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
, the morphism
$f:X\to Y$
, the morphism 
 $F(f)$
 of pointed sets sends the base-point of
$F(f)$
 of pointed sets sends the base-point of 
 $F(X)$
 to the base-point of
$F(X)$
 to the base-point of 
 $F(Y)$
, and we may therefore define the equivalence relation
$F(Y)$
, and we may therefore define the equivalence relation 
 $\approx $
 on
$\approx $
 on 
 $\widehat M$
 as in the preceding paragraph. Take
$\widehat M$
 as in the preceding paragraph. Take 
 $M=\widehat M/\approx $
. Again, for each
$M=\widehat M/\approx $
. Again, for each 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
 one has the mapping
$X\in Ob(J)$
 one has the mapping 
 $\phi _X:X\to M$
 that sends
$\phi _X:X\to M$
 that sends 
 $a\in X$
 to the
$a\in X$
 to the 
 $\approx $
-equivalence class of a in
$\approx $
-equivalence class of a in 
 $\widehat M$
, and
$\widehat M$
, and 
 $(M,\phi )$
 is a colimit of F.
$(M,\phi )$
 is a colimit of F.
 In passing now to the case where 
 $\mathcal {C}$
 is the category of partial groups, we face the problem that, in general, there will be no partial normal subgroup and no ‘quotient’ partial group corresponding to the equivalence relation
$\mathcal {C}$
 is the category of partial groups, we face the problem that, in general, there will be no partial normal subgroup and no ‘quotient’ partial group corresponding to the equivalence relation 
 $\approx $
. For this reason, we shall place restrictions on the sort of diagrams
$\approx $
. For this reason, we shall place restrictions on the sort of diagrams 
 $F:J\to Part$
 to be considered.
$F:J\to Part$
 to be considered.
Theorem Appendix A.5. Let 
 $Part$
 be the category of partial groups, let
$Part$
 be the category of partial groups, let 
 $Set^*$
 be the category of pointed sets, let J be a small category, and let
$Set^*$
 be the category of pointed sets, let J be a small category, and let 
 $F:J\to Part$
 be a J-shaped diagram. Assume
$F:J\to Part$
 be a J-shaped diagram. Assume 
- 
(1) For each ordered pair  $(X,Y)$
 of objects of J, there exists at most one J-morphism $(X,Y)$
 of objects of J, there exists at most one J-morphism $X\to Y$
. $X\to Y$
.
- 
(2) For each J-morphism  $f:X\to Y$
 the kernel of the homomorphism $f:X\to Y$
 the kernel of the homomorphism $F(f):F(X)\to F(Y)$
 of partial groups is trivial. $F(f):F(X)\to F(Y)$
 of partial groups is trivial.
Let 
 $F_0:J\to Sets^*$
 be the composition of F with the forgetful functor. Then there exists a colimit
$F_0:J\to Sets^*$
 be the composition of F with the forgetful functor. Then there exists a colimit 
 $(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 of F, and the forgetful functor sends
$(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 of F, and the forgetful functor sends 
 $(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 to a limit of
$(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 to a limit of 
 $F_0$
.
$F_0$
.
Proof. Let 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 be the pointed set obtained as the disjoint union of all of the partial groups
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 be the pointed set obtained as the disjoint union of all of the partial groups 
 $F(X)$
, for
$F(X)$
, for 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
, with base-points identified. There are then inclusion maps
$X\in Ob(J)$
, with base-points identified. There are then inclusion maps 
 $\iota _X:\mathbf {D}(F(X))\to \mathbf {W}(\widehat {\mathcal {M}})$
 of pointed sets (and where the base-points are empty words). Define
$\iota _X:\mathbf {D}(F(X))\to \mathbf {W}(\widehat {\mathcal {M}})$
 of pointed sets (and where the base-points are empty words). Define 
 $\widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
 to be the union of the images of the maps
$\widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
 to be the union of the images of the maps 
 $\iota _X$
. Thus,
$\iota _X$
. Thus, 
 $\widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
 is the disjoint union of the domains
$\widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
 is the disjoint union of the domains 
 $\mathbf {D}(F(X))$
, with base-points identified. There is then a mapping
$\mathbf {D}(F(X))$
, with base-points identified. There is then a mapping 
 $\widehat \Pi :\widehat {\mathbf {D}}\to \widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 whose restriction to
$\widehat \Pi :\widehat {\mathbf {D}}\to \widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 whose restriction to 
 $\mathbf {D}(F(X))$
 is the product
$\mathbf {D}(F(X))$
 is the product 
 $\Pi _X$
 on
$\Pi _X$
 on 
 $F(X)$
. The union of the inversion maps on the partial groups
$F(X)$
. The union of the inversion maps on the partial groups 
 $F(X)$
 is an involutory bijection on
$F(X)$
 is an involutory bijection on 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, and one may check that
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, and one may check that 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 is a partial group via these structures.
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 is a partial group via these structures.
 Let 
 $\sim $
 be the relation on
$\sim $
 be the relation on 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 given by
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
 given by 
 $a\sim b$
 if there exists a J-morphism
$a\sim b$
 if there exists a J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
 such that
$f:X\to Y$
 such that 
 $a\in F(X)$
,
$a\in F(X)$
, 
 $b\in F(Y)$
 and
$b\in F(Y)$
 and 
 $F(f):a\mapsto b$
. As in the discussion concerning colimits of sets, we find that
$F(f):a\mapsto b$
. As in the discussion concerning colimits of sets, we find that 
 $\sim $
 is reflexive, and there is an equivalence relation
$\sim $
 is reflexive, and there is an equivalence relation 
 $\approx $
 given by Lsymmetrising
$\approx $
 given by Lsymmetrising 
 $\sim $
. Extend
$\sim $
. Extend 
 $\approx $
 to an equivalence relation on
$\approx $
 to an equivalence relation on 
 $\mathbf {W}(\widehat {\mathcal {M}})$
 in the component-wise way. That is, if
$\mathbf {W}(\widehat {\mathcal {M}})$
 in the component-wise way. That is, if 
 $u=(a_1,\cdots ,a_m)$
 and
$u=(a_1,\cdots ,a_m)$
 and 
 $v=(b_1,\cdots ,b_n)$
 are words in the alphabet
$v=(b_1,\cdots ,b_n)$
 are words in the alphabet 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, then
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, then 
 $u\approx v$
 if and only if
$u\approx v$
 if and only if 
 $m=n$
 and
$m=n$
 and 
 $a_i\approx b_i$
 for all i. For
$a_i\approx b_i$
 for all i. For 
 $a\in \widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, we write
$a\in \widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, we write 
 $[a]$
 for the
$[a]$
 for the 
 $\approx $
-class of a. Then the
$\approx $
-class of a. Then the 
 $\approx $
-class of a word
$\approx $
-class of a word 
 $u=(a_1,\cdots ,a_n)$
 is the word
$u=(a_1,\cdots ,a_n)$
 is the word 
 $([a_1],\cdots ,[a_n])$
. Let
$([a_1],\cdots ,[a_n])$
. Let 
 $\mathcal {M}$
 be the pointed set
$\mathcal {M}$
 be the pointed set 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}/\approx $
 (whose base-point is the equivalence class of the base-point of
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}/\approx $
 (whose base-point is the equivalence class of the base-point of 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, and let
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, and let 
 $\mathbf {D}$
 be the set of all words
$\mathbf {D}$
 be the set of all words 
 $([a_1],\cdots ,[a_n])$
 having a representative
$([a_1],\cdots ,[a_n])$
 having a representative 
 $(a_1,\cdots ,a_n)\in \widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
.
$(a_1,\cdots ,a_n)\in \widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
.
 Let 
 $u=(a_1,\cdots ,a_n)\in \widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
, and assume that there exists at least one index k such that
$u=(a_1,\cdots ,a_n)\in \widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
, and assume that there exists at least one index k such that 
 $a_k$
 is not the identity element of
$a_k$
 is not the identity element of 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
. Then there is a unique object X of J such that
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
. Then there is a unique object X of J such that 
 $u\in \mathbf {D}(F(X))$
. Let also
$u\in \mathbf {D}(F(X))$
. Let also 
 $v=(b_1,\cdots ,b_n)\in \widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
, and assume
$v=(b_1,\cdots ,b_n)\in \widehat {\mathbf {D}}$
, and assume 
 $u\approx v$
. Then (2) implies that
$u\approx v$
. Then (2) implies that 
 $b_k$
 is not the identity element of
$b_k$
 is not the identity element of 
 $\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, and there is a unique object Y of J with
$\widehat {\mathcal {M}}$
, and there is a unique object Y of J with 
 $v\in \mathbf {D}(F(Y))$
. Let i be any index from
$v\in \mathbf {D}(F(Y))$
. Let i be any index from 
 $1$
 to n such that not both
$1$
 to n such that not both 
 $a_i$
 and
$a_i$
 and 
 $b_i$
 are identity elements. Then neither
$b_i$
 are identity elements. Then neither 
 $a_i$
 nor
$a_i$
 nor 
 $b_i$
 is an identity element, and (1) implies that either there is a unique J-morphism
$b_i$
 is an identity element, and (1) implies that either there is a unique J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
 and
$f:X\to Y$
 and 
 $F(f):a_i\mapsto b_i$
, or there is a unique J-morphism
$F(f):a_i\mapsto b_i$
, or there is a unique J-morphism 
 $g:Y\to X$
 and
$g:Y\to X$
 and 
 $F(g):b_i\mapsto a_i$
. If there exist both a J-morphism
$F(g):b_i\mapsto a_i$
. If there exist both a J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
 and a J-morphism
$f:X\to Y$
 and a J-morphism 
 $g:Y\to X$
, then (1) implies that f and g are isomorphisms and are inverse to each other, whence
$g:Y\to X$
, then (1) implies that f and g are isomorphisms and are inverse to each other, whence 
 $F(f):a_i\mapsto b_i$
 if and only if
$F(f):a_i\mapsto b_i$
 if and only if 
 $F(g):b_i\mapsto a_i$
. We may therefore assume without loss of generality that there exists a J-morphism
$F(g):b_i\mapsto a_i$
. We may therefore assume without loss of generality that there exists a J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
 and that
$f:X\to Y$
 and that 
 $F(f)$
 maps u to v component-wise. As
$F(f)$
 maps u to v component-wise. As 
 $F(f)$
 is a homomorphism
$F(f)$
 is a homomorphism 
 $F(X)\to F(Y)$
 of partial groups we then have
$F(X)\to F(Y)$
 of partial groups we then have 
 $\widehat \Pi (u)=\widehat \Pi (v)$
. We have thus shown that
$\widehat \Pi (u)=\widehat \Pi (v)$
. We have thus shown that 
 $\widehat \Pi $
 induces a mapping
$\widehat \Pi $
 induces a mapping 
 $\Pi :\mathbf {D}\to \mathcal {M}$
, and the reader may check that
$\Pi :\mathbf {D}\to \mathcal {M}$
, and the reader may check that 
 $\Pi $
 is a product, as defined in Definition 1.1. If
$\Pi $
 is a product, as defined in Definition 1.1. If 
 $\unicode{x0142} :\mathcal {H}\to \mathcal {K}$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups and
$\unicode{x0142} :\mathcal {H}\to \mathcal {K}$
 is a homomorphism of partial groups and 
 $a\in \mathcal {H}$
, then
$a\in \mathcal {H}$
, then 
 $(a^{-1})\unicode{x0142} =(a\unicode{x0142} )^{-1}$
, so there is a well-defined inversion mapping
$(a^{-1})\unicode{x0142} =(a\unicode{x0142} )^{-1}$
, so there is a well-defined inversion mapping 
 $\mathcal {M}\to \mathcal {M}$
 given by
$\mathcal {M}\to \mathcal {M}$
 given by 
 $[a]^{-1}=[a^{-1}]$
. Again it is left to the reader to check that with these structures,
$[a]^{-1}=[a^{-1}]$
. Again it is left to the reader to check that with these structures, 
 $\mathcal {M}$
 is a partial group.
$\mathcal {M}$
 is a partial group.
 For each 
 $X\in Ob(J)$
, define
$X\in Ob(J)$
, define 
 $\phi _X:F(X)\to \mathcal {M}$
 by
$\phi _X:F(X)\to \mathcal {M}$
 by 
 $a\phi _X=[a]$
. Then
$a\phi _X=[a]$
. Then 
 $\phi _X$
 is a homomorphism. If
$\phi _X$
 is a homomorphism. If 
 $a'\in F(X)$
 with
$a'\in F(X)$
 with 
 $[a]=[a']$
, then
$[a]=[a']$
, then 
 $a=a'$
, since the only J-morphism
$a=a'$
, since the only J-morphism 
 $X\to X$
 is the identity morphism. Thus
$X\to X$
 is the identity morphism. Thus 
 $\phi _X$
 is injective. For any J-morphism
$\phi _X$
 is injective. For any J-morphism 
 $f:X\to Y$
 and any
$f:X\to Y$
 and any 
 $a\in F(X)$
, we have
$a\in F(X)$
, we have 
 $[(a)F(f)]=[a]$
, so
$[(a)F(f)]=[a]$
, so 
 $(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 is a co-cone of F.
$(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 is a co-cone of F.
 Let 
 $(\mathcal {N},\psi )$
 be an arbitrary co-cone of F. Thus
$(\mathcal {N},\psi )$
 be an arbitrary co-cone of F. Thus 
 $\psi _X=F(f)\circ \psi _Y$
 whenever
$\psi _X=F(f)\circ \psi _Y$
 whenever 
 $f:X\to Y$
 is a J-morphism. That is, we have
$f:X\to Y$
 is a J-morphism. That is, we have 
 $a\psi _X=b\psi _Y$
 if
$a\psi _X=b\psi _Y$
 if 
 $F(f):a\mapsto b$
, and thus there is a well-defined mapping
$F(f):a\mapsto b$
, and thus there is a well-defined mapping 
 $\sigma :\mathcal {M}\to \mathcal {N}$
 given by
$\sigma :\mathcal {M}\to \mathcal {N}$
 given by 
 $[a]\mapsto [a\psi _X]$
 for
$[a]\mapsto [a\psi _X]$
 for 
 $a\in F(X)$
. Moreover, we have
$a\in F(X)$
. Moreover, we have 
 $\phi _X\circ \sigma =\psi _X$
, and
$\phi _X\circ \sigma =\psi _X$
, and 
 $\sigma $
 is the unique such mapping
$\sigma $
 is the unique such mapping 
 $\mathcal {M}\to \mathcal {N}$
. One checks that
$\mathcal {M}\to \mathcal {N}$
. One checks that 
 $\sigma $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups, in order to complete the proof that
$\sigma $
 is a homomorphism of partial groups, in order to complete the proof that 
 $(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 is a colimit of F.
$(\mathcal {M},\phi )$
 is a colimit of F.
Acknowledgements
The author extends his appreciation to Bernd Stellmacher for suggesting and proving the splitting lemma (Lemma 3.12) and for helpful suggestions regarding Definition 1.1. Special thanks are due to Ellen Henke for a detailed list of corrections and for her improvement in [Reference HenkeHe] on the results in Section 5.
Conflicts of Interest
None.
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
